| 1 | =head1 NAME |
| 2 | |
| 3 | Config - access Perl configuration information |
| 4 | |
| 5 | =head1 SYNOPSIS |
| 6 | |
| 7 | use Config; |
| 8 | if ($Config{usethreads}) { |
| 9 | print "has thread support\n" |
| 10 | } |
| 11 | |
| 12 | use Config qw(myconfig config_sh config_vars config_re); |
| 13 | |
| 14 | print myconfig(); |
| 15 | |
| 16 | print config_sh(); |
| 17 | |
| 18 | print config_re(); |
| 19 | |
| 20 | config_vars(qw(osname archname)); |
| 21 | |
| 22 | |
| 23 | =head1 DESCRIPTION |
| 24 | |
| 25 | The Config module contains all the information that was available to |
| 26 | the C<Configure> program at Perl build time (over 900 values). |
| 27 | |
| 28 | Shell variables from the F<config.sh> file (written by Configure) are |
| 29 | stored in the readonly-variable C<%Config>, indexed by their names. |
| 30 | |
| 31 | Values stored in config.sh as 'undef' are returned as undefined |
| 32 | values. The perl C<exists> function can be used to check if a |
| 33 | named variable exists. |
| 34 | |
| 35 | =over 4 |
| 36 | |
| 37 | =item myconfig() |
| 38 | |
| 39 | Returns a textual summary of the major perl configuration values. |
| 40 | See also C<-V> in L<perlrun/Switches>. |
| 41 | |
| 42 | =item config_sh() |
| 43 | |
| 44 | Returns the entire perl configuration information in the form of the |
| 45 | original config.sh shell variable assignment script. |
| 46 | |
| 47 | =item config_re($regex) |
| 48 | |
| 49 | Like config_sh() but returns, as a list, only the config entries who's |
| 50 | names match the $regex. |
| 51 | |
| 52 | =item config_vars(@names) |
| 53 | |
| 54 | Prints to STDOUT the values of the named configuration variable. Each is |
| 55 | printed on a separate line in the form: |
| 56 | |
| 57 | name='value'; |
| 58 | |
| 59 | Names which are unknown are output as C<name='UNKNOWN';>. |
| 60 | See also C<-V:name> in L<perlrun/Switches>. |
| 61 | |
| 62 | =back |
| 63 | |
| 64 | =head1 EXAMPLE |
| 65 | |
| 66 | Here's a more sophisticated example of using %Config: |
| 67 | |
| 68 | use Config; |
| 69 | use strict; |
| 70 | |
| 71 | my %sig_num; |
| 72 | my @sig_name; |
| 73 | unless($Config{sig_name} && $Config{sig_num}) { |
| 74 | die "No sigs?"; |
| 75 | } else { |
| 76 | my @names = split ' ', $Config{sig_name}; |
| 77 | @sig_num{@names} = split ' ', $Config{sig_num}; |
| 78 | foreach (@names) { |
| 79 | $sig_name[$sig_num{$_}] ||= $_; |
| 80 | } |
| 81 | } |
| 82 | |
| 83 | print "signal #17 = $sig_name[17]\n"; |
| 84 | if ($sig_num{ALRM}) { |
| 85 | print "SIGALRM is $sig_num{ALRM}\n"; |
| 86 | } |
| 87 | |
| 88 | =head1 WARNING |
| 89 | |
| 90 | Because this information is not stored within the perl executable |
| 91 | itself it is possible (but unlikely) that the information does not |
| 92 | relate to the actual perl binary which is being used to access it. |
| 93 | |
| 94 | The Config module is installed into the architecture and version |
| 95 | specific library directory ($Config{installarchlib}) and it checks the |
| 96 | perl version number when loaded. |
| 97 | |
| 98 | The values stored in config.sh may be either single-quoted or |
| 99 | double-quoted. Double-quoted strings are handy for those cases where you |
| 100 | need to include escape sequences in the strings. To avoid runtime variable |
| 101 | interpolation, any C<$> and C<@> characters are replaced by C<\$> and |
| 102 | C<\@>, respectively. This isn't foolproof, of course, so don't embed C<\$> |
| 103 | or C<\@> in double-quoted strings unless you're willing to deal with the |
| 104 | consequences. (The slashes will end up escaped and the C<$> or C<@> will |
| 105 | trigger variable interpolation) |
| 106 | |
| 107 | =head1 GLOSSARY |
| 108 | |
| 109 | Most C<Config> variables are determined by the C<Configure> script |
| 110 | on platforms supported by it (which is most UNIX platforms). Some |
| 111 | platforms have custom-made C<Config> variables, and may thus not have |
| 112 | some of the variables described below, or may have extraneous variables |
| 113 | specific to that particular port. See the port specific documentation |
| 114 | in such cases. |
| 115 | |
| 116 | =head2 _ |
| 117 | |
| 118 | =over 4 |
| 119 | |
| 120 | =item C<_a> |
| 121 | |
| 122 | From F<Unix.U>: |
| 123 | |
| 124 | This variable defines the extension used for ordinary library files. |
| 125 | For unix, it is F<.a>. The F<.> is included. Other possible |
| 126 | values include F<.lib>. |
| 127 | |
| 128 | =item C<_exe> |
| 129 | |
| 130 | From F<Unix.U>: |
| 131 | |
| 132 | This variable defines the extension used for executable files. |
| 133 | C<DJGPP>, Cygwin and F<OS/2> use F<.exe>. Stratus C<VOS> uses F<.pm>. |
| 134 | On operating systems which do not require a specific extension |
| 135 | for executable files, this variable is empty. |
| 136 | |
| 137 | =item C<_o> |
| 138 | |
| 139 | From F<Unix.U>: |
| 140 | |
| 141 | This variable defines the extension used for object files. |
| 142 | For unix, it is F<.o>. The F<.> is included. Other possible |
| 143 | values include F<.obj>. |
| 144 | |
| 145 | =back |
| 146 | |
| 147 | =head2 a |
| 148 | |
| 149 | =over 4 |
| 150 | |
| 151 | =item C<afs> |
| 152 | |
| 153 | From F<afs.U>: |
| 154 | |
| 155 | This variable is set to C<true> if C<AFS> (Andrew File System) is used |
| 156 | on the system, C<false> otherwise. It is possible to override this |
| 157 | with a hint value or command line option, but you'd better know |
| 158 | what you are doing. |
| 159 | |
| 160 | =item C<afsroot> |
| 161 | |
| 162 | From F<afs.U>: |
| 163 | |
| 164 | This variable is by default set to F</afs>. In the unlikely case |
| 165 | this is not the correct root, it is possible to override this with |
| 166 | a hint value or command line option. This will be used in subsequent |
| 167 | tests for AFSness in the Perl configure and test process. |
| 168 | |
| 169 | =item C<alignbytes> |
| 170 | |
| 171 | From F<alignbytes.U>: |
| 172 | |
| 173 | This variable holds the number of bytes required to align a |
| 174 | double-- or a long double when applicable. Usual values are |
| 175 | 2, 4 and 8. The default is eight, for safety. |
| 176 | |
| 177 | =item C<ansi2knr> |
| 178 | |
| 179 | From F<ansi2knr.U>: |
| 180 | |
| 181 | This variable is set if the user needs to run ansi2knr. |
| 182 | Currently, this is not supported, so we just abort. |
| 183 | |
| 184 | =item C<aphostname> |
| 185 | |
| 186 | From F<d_gethname.U>: |
| 187 | |
| 188 | This variable contains the command which can be used to compute the |
| 189 | host name. The command is fully qualified by its absolute path, to make |
| 190 | it safe when used by a process with super-user privileges. |
| 191 | |
| 192 | =item C<api_revision> |
| 193 | |
| 194 | From F<patchlevel.U>: |
| 195 | |
| 196 | The three variables, api_revision, api_version, and |
| 197 | api_subversion, specify the version of the oldest perl binary |
| 198 | compatible with the present perl. In a full version string |
| 199 | such as F<5.6.1>, api_revision is the C<5>. |
| 200 | Prior to 5.5.640, the format was a floating point number, |
| 201 | like 5.00563. |
| 202 | |
| 203 | F<perl.c>:incpush() and F<lib/lib.pm> will automatically search in |
| 204 | F<$sitelib/.>. for older directories back to the limit specified |
| 205 | by these api_ variables. This is only useful if you have a |
| 206 | perl library directory tree structured like the default one. |
| 207 | See C<INSTALL> for how this works. The versioned site_perl |
| 208 | directory was introduced in 5.005, so that is the lowest |
| 209 | possible value. The version list appropriate for the current |
| 210 | system is determined in F<inc_version_list.U>. |
| 211 | |
| 212 | C<XXX> To do: Since compatibility can depend on compile time |
| 213 | options (such as bincompat, longlong, etc.) it should |
| 214 | (perhaps) be set by Configure, but currently it isn't. |
| 215 | Currently, we read a hard-wired value from F<patchlevel.h>. |
| 216 | Perhaps what we ought to do is take the hard-wired value from |
| 217 | F<patchlevel.h> but then modify it if the current Configure |
| 218 | options warrant. F<patchlevel.h> then would use an #ifdef guard. |
| 219 | |
| 220 | =item C<api_subversion> |
| 221 | |
| 222 | From F<patchlevel.U>: |
| 223 | |
| 224 | The three variables, api_revision, api_version, and |
| 225 | api_subversion, specify the version of the oldest perl binary |
| 226 | compatible with the present perl. In a full version string |
| 227 | such as F<5.6.1>, api_subversion is the C<1>. See api_revision for |
| 228 | full details. |
| 229 | |
| 230 | =item C<api_version> |
| 231 | |
| 232 | From F<patchlevel.U>: |
| 233 | |
| 234 | The three variables, api_revision, api_version, and |
| 235 | api_subversion, specify the version of the oldest perl binary |
| 236 | compatible with the present perl. In a full version string |
| 237 | such as F<5.6.1>, api_version is the C<6>. See api_revision for |
| 238 | full details. As a special case, 5.5.0 is rendered in the |
| 239 | old-style as 5.005. (In the 5.005_0x maintenance series, |
| 240 | this was the only versioned directory in $sitelib.) |
| 241 | |
| 242 | =item C<api_versionstring> |
| 243 | |
| 244 | From F<patchlevel.U>: |
| 245 | |
| 246 | This variable combines api_revision, api_version, and |
| 247 | api_subversion in a format such as 5.6.1 (or 5_6_1) suitable |
| 248 | for use as a directory name. This is filesystem dependent. |
| 249 | |
| 250 | =item C<ar> |
| 251 | |
| 252 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 253 | |
| 254 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 255 | full pathname (if any) of the ar program. After Configure runs, |
| 256 | the value is reset to a plain C<ar> and is not useful. |
| 257 | |
| 258 | =item C<archlib> |
| 259 | |
| 260 | From F<archlib.U>: |
| 261 | |
| 262 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants |
| 263 | to put architecture-dependent public library files for $package. |
| 264 | It is most often a local directory such as F</usr/local/lib>. |
| 265 | Programs using this variable must be prepared to deal |
| 266 | with filename expansion. |
| 267 | |
| 268 | =item C<archlibexp> |
| 269 | |
| 270 | From F<archlib.U>: |
| 271 | |
| 272 | This variable is the same as the archlib variable, but is |
| 273 | filename expanded at configuration time, for convenient use. |
| 274 | |
| 275 | =item C<archname64> |
| 276 | |
| 277 | From F<use64bits.U>: |
| 278 | |
| 279 | This variable is used for the 64-bitness part of $archname. |
| 280 | |
| 281 | =item C<archname> |
| 282 | |
| 283 | From F<archname.U>: |
| 284 | |
| 285 | This variable is a short name to characterize the current |
| 286 | architecture. It is used mainly to construct the default archlib. |
| 287 | |
| 288 | =item C<archobjs> |
| 289 | |
| 290 | From F<Unix.U>: |
| 291 | |
| 292 | This variable defines any additional objects that must be linked |
| 293 | in with the program on this architecture. On unix, it is usually |
| 294 | empty. It is typically used to include emulations of unix calls |
| 295 | or other facilities. For perl on F<OS/2>, for example, this would |
| 296 | include F<os2/os2.obj>. |
| 297 | |
| 298 | =item C<asctime_r_proto> |
| 299 | |
| 300 | From F<d_asctime_r.U>: |
| 301 | |
| 302 | This variable encodes the prototype of asctime_r. |
| 303 | It is zero if d_asctime_r is undef, and one of the |
| 304 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_asctime_r |
| 305 | is defined. |
| 306 | |
| 307 | =item C<awk> |
| 308 | |
| 309 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 310 | |
| 311 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 312 | full pathname (if any) of the awk program. After Configure runs, |
| 313 | the value is reset to a plain C<awk> and is not useful. |
| 314 | |
| 315 | =back |
| 316 | |
| 317 | =head2 b |
| 318 | |
| 319 | =over 4 |
| 320 | |
| 321 | =item C<baserev> |
| 322 | |
| 323 | From F<baserev.U>: |
| 324 | |
| 325 | The base revision level of this package, from the F<.package> file. |
| 326 | |
| 327 | =item C<bash> |
| 328 | |
| 329 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 330 | |
| 331 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 332 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 333 | |
| 334 | =item C<bin> |
| 335 | |
| 336 | From F<bin.U>: |
| 337 | |
| 338 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants |
| 339 | to put publicly executable images for the package in question. It |
| 340 | is most often a local directory such as F</usr/local/bin>. Programs using |
| 341 | this variable must be prepared to deal with F<~name> substitution. |
| 342 | |
| 343 | =item C<binexp> |
| 344 | |
| 345 | From F<bin.U>: |
| 346 | |
| 347 | This is the same as the bin variable, but is filename expanded at |
| 348 | configuration time, for use in your makefiles. |
| 349 | |
| 350 | =item C<bison> |
| 351 | |
| 352 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 353 | |
| 354 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 355 | full pathname (if any) of the bison program. After Configure runs, |
| 356 | the value is reset to a plain C<bison> and is not useful. |
| 357 | |
| 358 | =item C<byacc> |
| 359 | |
| 360 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 361 | |
| 362 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 363 | full pathname (if any) of the byacc program. After Configure runs, |
| 364 | the value is reset to a plain C<byacc> and is not useful. |
| 365 | |
| 366 | =item C<byteorder> |
| 367 | |
| 368 | From F<byteorder.U>: |
| 369 | |
| 370 | This variable holds the byte order in a C<UV>. In the following, |
| 371 | larger digits indicate more significance. The variable byteorder |
| 372 | is either 4321 on a big-endian machine, or 1234 on a little-endian, |
| 373 | or 87654321 on a Cray ... or 3412 with weird order ! |
| 374 | |
| 375 | =back |
| 376 | |
| 377 | =head2 c |
| 378 | |
| 379 | =over 4 |
| 380 | |
| 381 | =item C<c> |
| 382 | |
| 383 | From F<n.U>: |
| 384 | |
| 385 | This variable contains the \c string if that is what causes the echo |
| 386 | command to suppress newline. Otherwise it is null. Correct usage is |
| 387 | $echo $n "prompt for a question: $c". |
| 388 | |
| 389 | =item C<castflags> |
| 390 | |
| 391 | From F<d_castneg.U>: |
| 392 | |
| 393 | This variable contains a flag that precise difficulties the |
| 394 | compiler has casting odd floating values to unsigned long: |
| 395 | 0 = ok |
| 396 | 1 = couldn't cast < 0 |
| 397 | 2 = couldn't cast >= 0x80000000 |
| 398 | 4 = couldn't cast in argument expression list |
| 399 | |
| 400 | =item C<cat> |
| 401 | |
| 402 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 403 | |
| 404 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 405 | full pathname (if any) of the cat program. After Configure runs, |
| 406 | the value is reset to a plain C<cat> and is not useful. |
| 407 | |
| 408 | =item C<cc> |
| 409 | |
| 410 | From F<cc.U>: |
| 411 | |
| 412 | This variable holds the name of a command to execute a C compiler which |
| 413 | can resolve multiple global references that happen to have the same |
| 414 | name. Usual values are C<cc> and C<gcc>. |
| 415 | Fervent C<ANSI> compilers may be called C<c89>. C<AIX> has xlc. |
| 416 | |
| 417 | =item C<cccdlflags> |
| 418 | |
| 419 | From F<dlsrc.U>: |
| 420 | |
| 421 | This variable contains any special flags that might need to be |
| 422 | passed with C<cc -c> to compile modules to be used to create a shared |
| 423 | library that will be used for dynamic loading. For hpux, this |
| 424 | should be +z. It is up to the makefile to use it. |
| 425 | |
| 426 | =item C<ccdlflags> |
| 427 | |
| 428 | From F<dlsrc.U>: |
| 429 | |
| 430 | This variable contains any special flags that might need to be |
| 431 | passed to cc to link with a shared library for dynamic loading. |
| 432 | It is up to the makefile to use it. For sunos 4.1, it should |
| 433 | be empty. |
| 434 | |
| 435 | =item C<ccflags> |
| 436 | |
| 437 | From F<ccflags.U>: |
| 438 | |
| 439 | This variable contains any additional C compiler flags desired by |
| 440 | the user. It is up to the Makefile to use this. |
| 441 | |
| 442 | =item C<ccflags_uselargefiles> |
| 443 | |
| 444 | From F<uselfs.U>: |
| 445 | |
| 446 | This variable contains the compiler flags needed by large file builds |
| 447 | and added to ccflags by hints files. |
| 448 | |
| 449 | =item C<ccname> |
| 450 | |
| 451 | From F<Checkcc.U>: |
| 452 | |
| 453 | This can set either by hints files or by Configure. If using |
| 454 | gcc, this is gcc, and if not, usually equal to cc, unimpressive, no? |
| 455 | Some platforms, however, make good use of this by storing the |
| 456 | flavor of the C compiler being used here. For example if using |
| 457 | the Sun WorkShop suite, ccname will be C<workshop>. |
| 458 | |
| 459 | =item C<ccsymbols> |
| 460 | |
| 461 | From F<Cppsym.U>: |
| 462 | |
| 463 | The variable contains the symbols defined by the C compiler alone. |
| 464 | The symbols defined by cpp or by cc when it calls cpp are not in |
| 465 | this list, see cppsymbols and cppccsymbols. |
| 466 | The list is a space-separated list of symbol=value tokens. |
| 467 | |
| 468 | =item C<ccversion> |
| 469 | |
| 470 | From F<Checkcc.U>: |
| 471 | |
| 472 | This can set either by hints files or by Configure. If using |
| 473 | a (non-gcc) vendor cc, this variable may contain a version for |
| 474 | the compiler. |
| 475 | |
| 476 | =item C<cf_by> |
| 477 | |
| 478 | From F<cf_who.U>: |
| 479 | |
| 480 | Login name of the person who ran the Configure script and answered the |
| 481 | questions. This is used to tag both F<config.sh> and F<config_h.SH>. |
| 482 | |
| 483 | =item C<cf_email> |
| 484 | |
| 485 | From F<cf_email.U>: |
| 486 | |
| 487 | Electronic mail address of the person who ran Configure. This can be |
| 488 | used by units that require the user's e-mail, like F<MailList.U>. |
| 489 | |
| 490 | =item C<cf_time> |
| 491 | |
| 492 | From F<cf_who.U>: |
| 493 | |
| 494 | Holds the output of the C<date> command when the configuration file was |
| 495 | produced. This is used to tag both F<config.sh> and F<config_h.SH>. |
| 496 | |
| 497 | =item C<charsize> |
| 498 | |
| 499 | From F<charsize.U>: |
| 500 | |
| 501 | This variable contains the value of the C<CHARSIZE> symbol, which |
| 502 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a character. |
| 503 | |
| 504 | =item C<chgrp> |
| 505 | |
| 506 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 507 | |
| 508 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 509 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 510 | |
| 511 | =item C<chmod> |
| 512 | |
| 513 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 514 | |
| 515 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 516 | full pathname (if any) of the chmod program. After Configure runs, |
| 517 | the value is reset to a plain C<chmod> and is not useful. |
| 518 | |
| 519 | =item C<chown> |
| 520 | |
| 521 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 522 | |
| 523 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 524 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 525 | |
| 526 | =item C<clocktype> |
| 527 | |
| 528 | From F<d_times.U>: |
| 529 | |
| 530 | This variable holds the type returned by times(). It can be long, |
| 531 | or clock_t on C<BSD> sites (in which case <sys/types.h> should be |
| 532 | included). |
| 533 | |
| 534 | =item C<comm> |
| 535 | |
| 536 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 537 | |
| 538 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 539 | full pathname (if any) of the comm program. After Configure runs, |
| 540 | the value is reset to a plain C<comm> and is not useful. |
| 541 | |
| 542 | =item C<compress> |
| 543 | |
| 544 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 545 | |
| 546 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 547 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 548 | |
| 549 | =item C<contains> |
| 550 | |
| 551 | From F<contains.U>: |
| 552 | |
| 553 | This variable holds the command to do a grep with a proper return |
| 554 | status. On most sane systems it is simply C<grep>. On insane systems |
| 555 | it is a grep followed by a cat followed by a test. This variable |
| 556 | is primarily for the use of other Configure units. |
| 557 | |
| 558 | =item C<cp> |
| 559 | |
| 560 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 561 | |
| 562 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 563 | full pathname (if any) of the cp program. After Configure runs, |
| 564 | the value is reset to a plain C<cp> and is not useful. |
| 565 | |
| 566 | =item C<cpio> |
| 567 | |
| 568 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 569 | |
| 570 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 571 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 572 | |
| 573 | =item C<cpp> |
| 574 | |
| 575 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 576 | |
| 577 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 578 | full pathname (if any) of the cpp program. After Configure runs, |
| 579 | the value is reset to a plain C<cpp> and is not useful. |
| 580 | |
| 581 | =item C<cpp_stuff> |
| 582 | |
| 583 | From F<cpp_stuff.U>: |
| 584 | |
| 585 | This variable contains an identification of the concatenation mechanism |
| 586 | used by the C preprocessor. |
| 587 | |
| 588 | =item C<cppccsymbols> |
| 589 | |
| 590 | From F<Cppsym.U>: |
| 591 | |
| 592 | The variable contains the symbols defined by the C compiler |
| 593 | when it calls cpp. The symbols defined by the cc alone or cpp |
| 594 | alone are not in this list, see ccsymbols and cppsymbols. |
| 595 | The list is a space-separated list of symbol=value tokens. |
| 596 | |
| 597 | =item C<cppflags> |
| 598 | |
| 599 | From F<ccflags.U>: |
| 600 | |
| 601 | This variable holds the flags that will be passed to the C pre- |
| 602 | processor. It is up to the Makefile to use it. |
| 603 | |
| 604 | =item C<cpplast> |
| 605 | |
| 606 | From F<cppstdin.U>: |
| 607 | |
| 608 | This variable has the same functionality as cppminus, only it applies |
| 609 | to cpprun and not cppstdin. |
| 610 | |
| 611 | =item C<cppminus> |
| 612 | |
| 613 | From F<cppstdin.U>: |
| 614 | |
| 615 | This variable contains the second part of the string which will invoke |
| 616 | the C preprocessor on the standard input and produce to standard |
| 617 | output. This variable will have the value C<-> if cppstdin needs |
| 618 | a minus to specify standard input, otherwise the value is "". |
| 619 | |
| 620 | =item C<cpprun> |
| 621 | |
| 622 | From F<cppstdin.U>: |
| 623 | |
| 624 | This variable contains the command which will invoke a C preprocessor |
| 625 | on standard input and put the output to stdout. It is guaranteed not |
| 626 | to be a wrapper and may be a null string if no preprocessor can be |
| 627 | made directly available. This preprocessor might be different from the |
| 628 | one used by the C compiler. Don't forget to append cpplast after the |
| 629 | preprocessor options. |
| 630 | |
| 631 | =item C<cppstdin> |
| 632 | |
| 633 | From F<cppstdin.U>: |
| 634 | |
| 635 | This variable contains the command which will invoke the C |
| 636 | preprocessor on standard input and put the output to stdout. |
| 637 | It is primarily used by other Configure units that ask about |
| 638 | preprocessor symbols. |
| 639 | |
| 640 | =item C<cppsymbols> |
| 641 | |
| 642 | From F<Cppsym.U>: |
| 643 | |
| 644 | The variable contains the symbols defined by the C preprocessor |
| 645 | alone. The symbols defined by cc or by cc when it calls cpp are |
| 646 | not in this list, see ccsymbols and cppccsymbols. |
| 647 | The list is a space-separated list of symbol=value tokens. |
| 648 | |
| 649 | =item C<crypt_r_proto> |
| 650 | |
| 651 | From F<d_crypt_r.U>: |
| 652 | |
| 653 | This variable encodes the prototype of crypt_r. |
| 654 | It is zero if d_crypt_r is undef, and one of the |
| 655 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_crypt_r |
| 656 | is defined. |
| 657 | |
| 658 | =item C<cryptlib> |
| 659 | |
| 660 | From F<d_crypt.U>: |
| 661 | |
| 662 | This variable holds -lcrypt or the path to a F<libcrypt.a> archive if |
| 663 | the crypt() function is not defined in the standard C library. It is |
| 664 | up to the Makefile to use this. |
| 665 | |
| 666 | =item C<csh> |
| 667 | |
| 668 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 669 | |
| 670 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 671 | full pathname (if any) of the csh program. After Configure runs, |
| 672 | the value is reset to a plain C<csh> and is not useful. |
| 673 | |
| 674 | =item C<ctermid_r_proto> |
| 675 | |
| 676 | From F<d_ctermid_r.U>: |
| 677 | |
| 678 | This variable encodes the prototype of ctermid_r. |
| 679 | It is zero if d_ctermid_r is undef, and one of the |
| 680 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_ctermid_r |
| 681 | is defined. |
| 682 | |
| 683 | =item C<ctime_r_proto> |
| 684 | |
| 685 | From F<d_ctime_r.U>: |
| 686 | |
| 687 | This variable encodes the prototype of ctime_r. |
| 688 | It is zero if d_ctime_r is undef, and one of the |
| 689 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_ctime_r |
| 690 | is defined. |
| 691 | |
| 692 | =back |
| 693 | |
| 694 | =head2 d |
| 695 | |
| 696 | =over 4 |
| 697 | |
| 698 | =item C<d__fwalk> |
| 699 | |
| 700 | From F<d__fwalk.U>: |
| 701 | |
| 702 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS__FWALK> if _fwalk() is |
| 703 | available to apply a function to all the file handles. |
| 704 | |
| 705 | =item C<d_access> |
| 706 | |
| 707 | From F<d_access.U>: |
| 708 | |
| 709 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ACCESS> if the access() system |
| 710 | call is available to check for access permissions using real IDs. |
| 711 | |
| 712 | =item C<d_accessx> |
| 713 | |
| 714 | From F<d_accessx.U>: |
| 715 | |
| 716 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ACCESSX> symbol, which |
| 717 | indicates to the C program that the accessx() routine is available. |
| 718 | |
| 719 | =item C<d_aintl> |
| 720 | |
| 721 | From F<d_aintl.U>: |
| 722 | |
| 723 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_AINTL> symbol, which |
| 724 | indicates to the C program that the aintl() routine is available. |
| 725 | If copysignl is also present we can emulate modfl. |
| 726 | |
| 727 | =item C<d_alarm> |
| 728 | |
| 729 | From F<d_alarm.U>: |
| 730 | |
| 731 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ALARM> symbol, which |
| 732 | indicates to the C program that the alarm() routine is available. |
| 733 | |
| 734 | =item C<d_archlib> |
| 735 | |
| 736 | From F<archlib.U>: |
| 737 | |
| 738 | This variable conditionally defines C<ARCHLIB> to hold the pathname |
| 739 | of architecture-dependent library files for $package. If |
| 740 | $archlib is the same as $privlib, then this is set to undef. |
| 741 | |
| 742 | =item C<d_asctime_r> |
| 743 | |
| 744 | From F<d_asctime_r.U>: |
| 745 | |
| 746 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ASCTIME_R> symbol, |
| 747 | which indicates to the C program that the asctime_r() |
| 748 | routine is available. |
| 749 | |
| 750 | =item C<d_atolf> |
| 751 | |
| 752 | From F<atolf.U>: |
| 753 | |
| 754 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ATOLF> symbol, which |
| 755 | indicates to the C program that the atolf() routine is available. |
| 756 | |
| 757 | =item C<d_atoll> |
| 758 | |
| 759 | From F<atoll.U>: |
| 760 | |
| 761 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ATOLL> symbol, which |
| 762 | indicates to the C program that the atoll() routine is available. |
| 763 | |
| 764 | =item C<d_attribute_format> |
| 765 | |
| 766 | From F<d_attribut_format.U>: |
| 767 | |
| 768 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_FORMAT>, which |
| 769 | indicates the C compiler can check for printf-like formats. |
| 770 | |
| 771 | =item C<d_attribute_malloc> |
| 772 | |
| 773 | From F<d_attribute_malloc.U>: |
| 774 | |
| 775 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_MALLOC>, which |
| 776 | indicates the C compiler can understand functions as having |
| 777 | malloc-like semantics. |
| 778 | |
| 779 | =item C<d_attribute_nonnull> |
| 780 | |
| 781 | From F<d_attribute_nonnull.U>: |
| 782 | |
| 783 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_NONNULL>, which |
| 784 | indicates that the C compiler can know that certain arguments |
| 785 | must not be C<NULL>, and will check accordingly at compile time. |
| 786 | |
| 787 | =item C<d_attribute_noreturn> |
| 788 | |
| 789 | From F<d_attribute_noreturn.U>: |
| 790 | |
| 791 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_NORETURN>, which |
| 792 | indicates that the C compiler can know that certain functions |
| 793 | are guaranteed never to return. |
| 794 | |
| 795 | =item C<d_attribute_pure> |
| 796 | |
| 797 | From F<d_attribute_pure.U>: |
| 798 | |
| 799 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_PURE>, which |
| 800 | indicates that the C compiler can know that certain functions |
| 801 | are C<pure> functions, meaning that they have no side effects, and |
| 802 | only rely on function input F<and/or> global data for their results. |
| 803 | |
| 804 | =item C<d_attribute_unused> |
| 805 | |
| 806 | From F<d_attribute_unused.U>: |
| 807 | |
| 808 | This variable conditionally defines C<HASATTRIBUTE_UNUSED>, which |
| 809 | indicates that the C compiler can know that certain variables |
| 810 | and arguments may not always be used, and to not throw warnings |
| 811 | if they don't get used. |
| 812 | |
| 813 | =item C<d_attribute_warn_unused_result> |
| 814 | |
| 815 | From F<d_attribute_warn_unused_result.U>: |
| 816 | |
| 817 | This variable conditionally defines |
| 818 | C<HASATTRIBUTE_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT>, which indicates that the C |
| 819 | compiler can know that certain functions have a return values |
| 820 | that must not be ignored, such as malloc() or open(). |
| 821 | |
| 822 | =item C<d_bcmp> |
| 823 | |
| 824 | From F<d_bcmp.U>: |
| 825 | |
| 826 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_BCMP> symbol if |
| 827 | the bcmp() routine is available to compare strings. |
| 828 | |
| 829 | =item C<d_bcopy> |
| 830 | |
| 831 | From F<d_bcopy.U>: |
| 832 | |
| 833 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_BCOPY> symbol if |
| 834 | the bcopy() routine is available to copy strings. |
| 835 | |
| 836 | =item C<d_bsd> |
| 837 | |
| 838 | From F<Guess.U>: |
| 839 | |
| 840 | This symbol conditionally defines the symbol C<BSD> when running on a |
| 841 | C<BSD> system. |
| 842 | |
| 843 | =item C<d_bsdgetpgrp> |
| 844 | |
| 845 | From F<d_getpgrp.U>: |
| 846 | |
| 847 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_BSD_GETPGRP> if |
| 848 | getpgrp needs one arguments whereas C<USG> one needs none. |
| 849 | |
| 850 | =item C<d_bsdsetpgrp> |
| 851 | |
| 852 | From F<d_setpgrp.U>: |
| 853 | |
| 854 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_BSD_SETPGRP> if |
| 855 | setpgrp needs two arguments whereas C<USG> one needs none. |
| 856 | See also d_setpgid for a C<POSIX> interface. |
| 857 | |
| 858 | =item C<d_bzero> |
| 859 | |
| 860 | From F<d_bzero.U>: |
| 861 | |
| 862 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_BZERO> symbol if |
| 863 | the bzero() routine is available to set memory to 0. |
| 864 | |
| 865 | =item C<d_casti32> |
| 866 | |
| 867 | From F<d_casti32.U>: |
| 868 | |
| 869 | This variable conditionally defines CASTI32, which indicates |
| 870 | whether the C compiler can cast large floats to 32-bit ints. |
| 871 | |
| 872 | =item C<d_castneg> |
| 873 | |
| 874 | From F<d_castneg.U>: |
| 875 | |
| 876 | This variable conditionally defines C<CASTNEG>, which indicates |
| 877 | wether the C compiler can cast negative float to unsigned. |
| 878 | |
| 879 | =item C<d_charvspr> |
| 880 | |
| 881 | From F<d_vprintf.U>: |
| 882 | |
| 883 | This variable conditionally defines C<CHARVSPRINTF> if this system |
| 884 | has vsprintf returning type (char*). The trend seems to be to |
| 885 | declare it as "int vsprintf()". |
| 886 | |
| 887 | =item C<d_chown> |
| 888 | |
| 889 | From F<d_chown.U>: |
| 890 | |
| 891 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CHOWN> symbol, which |
| 892 | indicates to the C program that the chown() routine is available. |
| 893 | |
| 894 | =item C<d_chroot> |
| 895 | |
| 896 | From F<d_chroot.U>: |
| 897 | |
| 898 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CHROOT> symbol, which |
| 899 | indicates to the C program that the chroot() routine is available. |
| 900 | |
| 901 | =item C<d_chsize> |
| 902 | |
| 903 | From F<d_chsize.U>: |
| 904 | |
| 905 | This variable conditionally defines the C<CHSIZE> symbol, which |
| 906 | indicates to the C program that the chsize() routine is available |
| 907 | to truncate files. You might need a -lx to get this routine. |
| 908 | |
| 909 | =item C<d_class> |
| 910 | |
| 911 | From F<d_class.U>: |
| 912 | |
| 913 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CLASS> symbol, which |
| 914 | indicates to the C program that the class() routine is available. |
| 915 | |
| 916 | =item C<d_clearenv> |
| 917 | |
| 918 | From F<d_clearenv.U>: |
| 919 | |
| 920 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CLEARENV> symbol, which |
| 921 | indicates to the C program that the clearenv () routine is available. |
| 922 | |
| 923 | =item C<d_closedir> |
| 924 | |
| 925 | From F<d_closedir.U>: |
| 926 | |
| 927 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_CLOSEDIR> if closedir() is |
| 928 | available. |
| 929 | |
| 930 | =item C<d_cmsghdr_s> |
| 931 | |
| 932 | From F<d_cmsghdr_s.U>: |
| 933 | |
| 934 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_CMSGHDR> symbol, |
| 935 | which indicates that the struct cmsghdr is supported. |
| 936 | |
| 937 | =item C<d_const> |
| 938 | |
| 939 | From F<d_const.U>: |
| 940 | |
| 941 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HASCONST> symbol, which |
| 942 | indicates to the C program that this C compiler knows about the |
| 943 | const type. |
| 944 | |
| 945 | =item C<d_copysignl> |
| 946 | |
| 947 | From F<d_copysignl.U>: |
| 948 | |
| 949 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_COPYSIGNL> symbol, which |
| 950 | indicates to the C program that the copysignl() routine is available. |
| 951 | If aintl is also present we can emulate modfl. |
| 952 | |
| 953 | =item C<d_crypt> |
| 954 | |
| 955 | From F<d_crypt.U>: |
| 956 | |
| 957 | This variable conditionally defines the C<CRYPT> symbol, which |
| 958 | indicates to the C program that the crypt() routine is available |
| 959 | to encrypt passwords and the like. |
| 960 | |
| 961 | =item C<d_crypt_r> |
| 962 | |
| 963 | From F<d_crypt_r.U>: |
| 964 | |
| 965 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CRYPT_R> symbol, |
| 966 | which indicates to the C program that the crypt_r() |
| 967 | routine is available. |
| 968 | |
| 969 | =item C<d_csh> |
| 970 | |
| 971 | From F<d_csh.U>: |
| 972 | |
| 973 | This variable conditionally defines the C<CSH> symbol, which |
| 974 | indicates to the C program that the C-shell exists. |
| 975 | |
| 976 | =item C<d_ctermid_r> |
| 977 | |
| 978 | From F<d_ctermid_r.U>: |
| 979 | |
| 980 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CTERMID_R> symbol, |
| 981 | which indicates to the C program that the ctermid_r() |
| 982 | routine is available. |
| 983 | |
| 984 | =item C<d_ctime_r> |
| 985 | |
| 986 | From F<d_ctime_r.U>: |
| 987 | |
| 988 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CTIME_R> symbol, |
| 989 | which indicates to the C program that the ctime_r() |
| 990 | routine is available. |
| 991 | |
| 992 | =item C<d_cuserid> |
| 993 | |
| 994 | From F<d_cuserid.U>: |
| 995 | |
| 996 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_CUSERID> symbol, which |
| 997 | indicates to the C program that the cuserid() routine is available |
| 998 | to get character login names. |
| 999 | |
| 1000 | =item C<d_dbl_dig> |
| 1001 | |
| 1002 | From F<d_dbl_dig.U>: |
| 1003 | |
| 1004 | This variable conditionally defines d_dbl_dig if this system's |
| 1005 | header files provide C<DBL_DIG>, which is the number of significant |
| 1006 | digits in a double precision number. |
| 1007 | |
| 1008 | =item C<d_dbminitproto> |
| 1009 | |
| 1010 | From F<d_dbminitproto.U>: |
| 1011 | |
| 1012 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DBMINIT_PROTO> symbol, |
| 1013 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides |
| 1014 | a prototype for the dbminit() function. Otherwise, it is |
| 1015 | up to the program to supply one. |
| 1016 | |
| 1017 | =item C<d_difftime> |
| 1018 | |
| 1019 | From F<d_difftime.U>: |
| 1020 | |
| 1021 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DIFFTIME> symbol, which |
| 1022 | indicates to the C program that the difftime() routine is available. |
| 1023 | |
| 1024 | =item C<d_dirfd> |
| 1025 | |
| 1026 | From F<d_dirfd.U>: |
| 1027 | |
| 1028 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DIRFD> constant, |
| 1029 | which indicates to the C program that dirfd() is available |
| 1030 | to return the file descriptor of a directory stream. |
| 1031 | |
| 1032 | =item C<d_dirnamlen> |
| 1033 | |
| 1034 | From F<i_dirent.U>: |
| 1035 | |
| 1036 | This variable conditionally defines C<DIRNAMLEN>, which indicates |
| 1037 | to the C program that the length of directory entry names is |
| 1038 | provided by a d_namelen field. |
| 1039 | |
| 1040 | =item C<d_dlerror> |
| 1041 | |
| 1042 | From F<d_dlerror.U>: |
| 1043 | |
| 1044 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DLERROR> symbol, which |
| 1045 | indicates to the C program that the dlerror() routine is available. |
| 1046 | |
| 1047 | =item C<d_dlopen> |
| 1048 | |
| 1049 | From F<d_dlopen.U>: |
| 1050 | |
| 1051 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_DLOPEN> symbol, which |
| 1052 | indicates to the C program that the dlopen() routine is available. |
| 1053 | |
| 1054 | =item C<d_dlsymun> |
| 1055 | |
| 1056 | From F<d_dlsymun.U>: |
| 1057 | |
| 1058 | This variable conditionally defines C<DLSYM_NEEDS_UNDERSCORE>, which |
| 1059 | indicates that we need to prepend an underscore to the symbol |
| 1060 | name before calling dlsym(). |
| 1061 | |
| 1062 | =item C<d_dosuid> |
| 1063 | |
| 1064 | From F<d_dosuid.U>: |
| 1065 | |
| 1066 | This variable conditionally defines the symbol C<DOSUID>, which |
| 1067 | tells the C program that it should insert setuid emulation code |
| 1068 | on hosts which have setuid #! scripts disabled. |
| 1069 | |
| 1070 | =item C<d_drand48_r> |
| 1071 | |
| 1072 | From F<d_drand48_r.U>: |
| 1073 | |
| 1074 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_DRAND48_R symbol, |
| 1075 | which indicates to the C program that the drand48_r() |
| 1076 | routine is available. |
| 1077 | |
| 1078 | =item C<d_drand48proto> |
| 1079 | |
| 1080 | From F<d_drand48proto.U>: |
| 1081 | |
| 1082 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_DRAND48_PROTO symbol, |
| 1083 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides |
| 1084 | a prototype for the drand48() function. Otherwise, it is |
| 1085 | up to the program to supply one. |
| 1086 | |
| 1087 | =item C<d_dup2> |
| 1088 | |
| 1089 | From F<d_dup2.U>: |
| 1090 | |
| 1091 | This variable conditionally defines HAS_DUP2 if dup2() is |
| 1092 | available to duplicate file descriptors. |
| 1093 | |
| 1094 | =item C<d_eaccess> |
| 1095 | |
| 1096 | From F<d_eaccess.U>: |
| 1097 | |
| 1098 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_EACCESS> symbol, which |
| 1099 | indicates to the C program that the eaccess() routine is available. |
| 1100 | |
| 1101 | =item C<d_endgrent> |
| 1102 | |
| 1103 | From F<d_endgrent.U>: |
| 1104 | |
| 1105 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDGRENT> symbol, which |
| 1106 | indicates to the C program that the endgrent() routine is available |
| 1107 | for sequential access of the group database. |
| 1108 | |
| 1109 | =item C<d_endgrent_r> |
| 1110 | |
| 1111 | From F<d_endgrent_r.U>: |
| 1112 | |
| 1113 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDGRENT_R> symbol, |
| 1114 | which indicates to the C program that the endgrent_r() |
| 1115 | routine is available. |
| 1116 | |
| 1117 | =item C<d_endhent> |
| 1118 | |
| 1119 | From F<d_endhent.U>: |
| 1120 | |
| 1121 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ENDHOSTENT> if endhostent() is |
| 1122 | available to close whatever was being used for host queries. |
| 1123 | |
| 1124 | =item C<d_endhostent_r> |
| 1125 | |
| 1126 | From F<d_endhostent_r.U>: |
| 1127 | |
| 1128 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDHOSTENT_R> symbol, |
| 1129 | which indicates to the C program that the endhostent_r() |
| 1130 | routine is available. |
| 1131 | |
| 1132 | =item C<d_endnent> |
| 1133 | |
| 1134 | From F<d_endnent.U>: |
| 1135 | |
| 1136 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ENDNETENT> if endnetent() is |
| 1137 | available to close whatever was being used for network queries. |
| 1138 | |
| 1139 | =item C<d_endnetent_r> |
| 1140 | |
| 1141 | From F<d_endnetent_r.U>: |
| 1142 | |
| 1143 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDNETENT_R> symbol, |
| 1144 | which indicates to the C program that the endnetent_r() |
| 1145 | routine is available. |
| 1146 | |
| 1147 | =item C<d_endpent> |
| 1148 | |
| 1149 | From F<d_endpent.U>: |
| 1150 | |
| 1151 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ENDPROTOENT> if endprotoent() is |
| 1152 | available to close whatever was being used for protocol queries. |
| 1153 | |
| 1154 | =item C<d_endprotoent_r> |
| 1155 | |
| 1156 | From F<d_endprotoent_r.U>: |
| 1157 | |
| 1158 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDPROTOENT_R> symbol, |
| 1159 | which indicates to the C program that the endprotoent_r() |
| 1160 | routine is available. |
| 1161 | |
| 1162 | =item C<d_endpwent> |
| 1163 | |
| 1164 | From F<d_endpwent.U>: |
| 1165 | |
| 1166 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDPWENT> symbol, which |
| 1167 | indicates to the C program that the endpwent() routine is available |
| 1168 | for sequential access of the passwd database. |
| 1169 | |
| 1170 | =item C<d_endpwent_r> |
| 1171 | |
| 1172 | From F<d_endpwent_r.U>: |
| 1173 | |
| 1174 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDPWENT_R> symbol, |
| 1175 | which indicates to the C program that the endpwent_r() |
| 1176 | routine is available. |
| 1177 | |
| 1178 | =item C<d_endsent> |
| 1179 | |
| 1180 | From F<d_endsent.U>: |
| 1181 | |
| 1182 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_ENDSERVENT> if endservent() is |
| 1183 | available to close whatever was being used for service queries. |
| 1184 | |
| 1185 | =item C<d_endservent_r> |
| 1186 | |
| 1187 | From F<d_endservent_r.U>: |
| 1188 | |
| 1189 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ENDSERVENT_R> symbol, |
| 1190 | which indicates to the C program that the endservent_r() |
| 1191 | routine is available. |
| 1192 | |
| 1193 | =item C<d_eofnblk> |
| 1194 | |
| 1195 | From F<nblock_io.U>: |
| 1196 | |
| 1197 | This variable conditionally defines C<EOF_NONBLOCK> if C<EOF> can be seen |
| 1198 | when reading from a non-blocking I/O source. |
| 1199 | |
| 1200 | =item C<d_eunice> |
| 1201 | |
| 1202 | From F<Guess.U>: |
| 1203 | |
| 1204 | This variable conditionally defines the symbols C<EUNICE> and C<VAX>, which |
| 1205 | alerts the C program that it must deal with ideosyncracies of C<VMS>. |
| 1206 | |
| 1207 | =item C<d_faststdio> |
| 1208 | |
| 1209 | From F<d_faststdio.U>: |
| 1210 | |
| 1211 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FAST_STDIO> symbol, |
| 1212 | which indicates to the C program that the "fast stdio" is available |
| 1213 | to manipulate the stdio buffers directly. |
| 1214 | |
| 1215 | =item C<d_fchdir> |
| 1216 | |
| 1217 | From F<d_fchdir.U>: |
| 1218 | |
| 1219 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FCHDIR> symbol, which |
| 1220 | indicates to the C program that the fchdir() routine is available. |
| 1221 | |
| 1222 | =item C<d_fchmod> |
| 1223 | |
| 1224 | From F<d_fchmod.U>: |
| 1225 | |
| 1226 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FCHMOD> symbol, which |
| 1227 | indicates to the C program that the fchmod() routine is available |
| 1228 | to change mode of opened files. |
| 1229 | |
| 1230 | =item C<d_fchown> |
| 1231 | |
| 1232 | From F<d_fchown.U>: |
| 1233 | |
| 1234 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FCHOWN> symbol, which |
| 1235 | indicates to the C program that the fchown() routine is available |
| 1236 | to change ownership of opened files. |
| 1237 | |
| 1238 | =item C<d_fcntl> |
| 1239 | |
| 1240 | From F<d_fcntl.U>: |
| 1241 | |
| 1242 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FCNTL> symbol, and indicates |
| 1243 | whether the fcntl() function exists |
| 1244 | |
| 1245 | =item C<d_fcntl_can_lock> |
| 1246 | |
| 1247 | From F<d_fcntl_can_lock.U>: |
| 1248 | |
| 1249 | This variable conditionally defines the C<FCNTL_CAN_LOCK> symbol |
| 1250 | and indicates whether file locking with fcntl() works. |
| 1251 | |
| 1252 | =item C<d_fd_macros> |
| 1253 | |
| 1254 | From F<d_fd_set.U>: |
| 1255 | |
| 1256 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<HAS_FD_MACROS> symbol, |
| 1257 | which indicates if your C compiler knows about the macros which |
| 1258 | manipulate an fd_set. |
| 1259 | |
| 1260 | =item C<d_fd_set> |
| 1261 | |
| 1262 | From F<d_fd_set.U>: |
| 1263 | |
| 1264 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<HAS_FD_SET> symbol, |
| 1265 | which indicates if your C compiler knows about the fd_set typedef. |
| 1266 | |
| 1267 | =item C<d_fds_bits> |
| 1268 | |
| 1269 | From F<d_fd_set.U>: |
| 1270 | |
| 1271 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<HAS_FDS_BITS> symbol, |
| 1272 | which indicates if your fd_set typedef contains the fds_bits member. |
| 1273 | If you have an fd_set typedef, but the dweebs who installed it did |
| 1274 | a half-fast job and neglected to provide the macros to manipulate |
| 1275 | an fd_set, C<HAS_FDS_BITS> will let us know how to fix the gaffe. |
| 1276 | |
| 1277 | =item C<d_fgetpos> |
| 1278 | |
| 1279 | From F<d_fgetpos.U>: |
| 1280 | |
| 1281 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_FGETPOS> if fgetpos() is |
| 1282 | available to get the file position indicator. |
| 1283 | |
| 1284 | =item C<d_finite> |
| 1285 | |
| 1286 | From F<d_finite.U>: |
| 1287 | |
| 1288 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FINITE> symbol, which |
| 1289 | indicates to the C program that the finite() routine is available. |
| 1290 | |
| 1291 | =item C<d_finitel> |
| 1292 | |
| 1293 | From F<d_finitel.U>: |
| 1294 | |
| 1295 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FINITEL> symbol, which |
| 1296 | indicates to the C program that the finitel() routine is available. |
| 1297 | |
| 1298 | =item C<d_flexfnam> |
| 1299 | |
| 1300 | From F<d_flexfnam.U>: |
| 1301 | |
| 1302 | This variable conditionally defines the C<FLEXFILENAMES> symbol, which |
| 1303 | indicates that the system supports filenames longer than 14 characters. |
| 1304 | |
| 1305 | =item C<d_flock> |
| 1306 | |
| 1307 | From F<d_flock.U>: |
| 1308 | |
| 1309 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_FLOCK> if flock() is |
| 1310 | available to do file locking. |
| 1311 | |
| 1312 | =item C<d_flockproto> |
| 1313 | |
| 1314 | From F<d_flockproto.U>: |
| 1315 | |
| 1316 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FLOCK_PROTO> symbol, |
| 1317 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides |
| 1318 | a prototype for the flock() function. Otherwise, it is |
| 1319 | up to the program to supply one. |
| 1320 | |
| 1321 | =item C<d_fork> |
| 1322 | |
| 1323 | From F<d_fork.U>: |
| 1324 | |
| 1325 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FORK> symbol, which |
| 1326 | indicates to the C program that the fork() routine is available. |
| 1327 | |
| 1328 | =item C<d_fp_class> |
| 1329 | |
| 1330 | From F<d_fp_class.U>: |
| 1331 | |
| 1332 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FP_CLASS> symbol, which |
| 1333 | indicates to the C program that the fp_class() routine is available. |
| 1334 | |
| 1335 | =item C<d_fpathconf> |
| 1336 | |
| 1337 | From F<d_pathconf.U>: |
| 1338 | |
| 1339 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FPATHCONF> symbol, which |
| 1340 | indicates to the C program that the pathconf() routine is available |
| 1341 | to determine file-system related limits and options associated |
| 1342 | with a given open file descriptor. |
| 1343 | |
| 1344 | =item C<d_fpclass> |
| 1345 | |
| 1346 | From F<d_fpclass.U>: |
| 1347 | |
| 1348 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FPCLASS> symbol, which |
| 1349 | indicates to the C program that the fpclass() routine is available. |
| 1350 | |
| 1351 | =item C<d_fpclassify> |
| 1352 | |
| 1353 | From F<d_fpclassify.U>: |
| 1354 | |
| 1355 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FPCLASSIFY> symbol, which |
| 1356 | indicates to the C program that the fpclassify() routine is available. |
| 1357 | |
| 1358 | =item C<d_fpclassl> |
| 1359 | |
| 1360 | From F<d_fpclassl.U>: |
| 1361 | |
| 1362 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FPCLASSL> symbol, which |
| 1363 | indicates to the C program that the fpclassl() routine is available. |
| 1364 | |
| 1365 | =item C<d_fpos64_t> |
| 1366 | |
| 1367 | From F<d_fpos64_t.U>: |
| 1368 | |
| 1369 | This symbol will be defined if the C compiler supports fpos64_t. |
| 1370 | |
| 1371 | =item C<d_frexpl> |
| 1372 | |
| 1373 | From F<d_frexpl.U>: |
| 1374 | |
| 1375 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FREXPL> symbol, which |
| 1376 | indicates to the C program that the frexpl() routine is available. |
| 1377 | |
| 1378 | =item C<d_fs_data_s> |
| 1379 | |
| 1380 | From F<d_fs_data_s.U>: |
| 1381 | |
| 1382 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_FS_DATA> symbol, |
| 1383 | which indicates that the struct fs_data is supported. |
| 1384 | |
| 1385 | =item C<d_fseeko> |
| 1386 | |
| 1387 | From F<d_fseeko.U>: |
| 1388 | |
| 1389 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FSEEKO> symbol, which |
| 1390 | indicates to the C program that the fseeko() routine is available. |
| 1391 | |
| 1392 | =item C<d_fsetpos> |
| 1393 | |
| 1394 | From F<d_fsetpos.U>: |
| 1395 | |
| 1396 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_FSETPOS> if fsetpos() is |
| 1397 | available to set the file position indicator. |
| 1398 | |
| 1399 | =item C<d_fstatfs> |
| 1400 | |
| 1401 | From F<d_fstatfs.U>: |
| 1402 | |
| 1403 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FSTATFS> symbol, which |
| 1404 | indicates to the C program that the fstatfs() routine is available. |
| 1405 | |
| 1406 | =item C<d_fstatvfs> |
| 1407 | |
| 1408 | From F<d_statvfs.U>: |
| 1409 | |
| 1410 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FSTATVFS> symbol, which |
| 1411 | indicates to the C program that the fstatvfs() routine is available. |
| 1412 | |
| 1413 | =item C<d_fsync> |
| 1414 | |
| 1415 | From F<d_fsync.U>: |
| 1416 | |
| 1417 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FSYNC> symbol, which |
| 1418 | indicates to the C program that the fsync() routine is available. |
| 1419 | |
| 1420 | =item C<d_ftello> |
| 1421 | |
| 1422 | From F<d_ftello.U>: |
| 1423 | |
| 1424 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FTELLO> symbol, which |
| 1425 | indicates to the C program that the ftello() routine is available. |
| 1426 | |
| 1427 | =item C<d_ftime> |
| 1428 | |
| 1429 | From F<d_ftime.U>: |
| 1430 | |
| 1431 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FTIME> symbol, which indicates |
| 1432 | that the ftime() routine exists. The ftime() routine is basically |
| 1433 | a sub-second accuracy clock. |
| 1434 | |
| 1435 | =item C<d_futimes> |
| 1436 | |
| 1437 | From F<f_futimes.U>: |
| 1438 | |
| 1439 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_FUTIMES> symbol, which |
| 1440 | indicates to the C program that the futimes() routine is available. |
| 1441 | |
| 1442 | =item C<d_Gconvert> |
| 1443 | |
| 1444 | From F<d_gconvert.U>: |
| 1445 | |
| 1446 | This variable holds what Gconvert is defined as to convert |
| 1447 | floating point numbers into strings. By default, Configure |
| 1448 | sets C<this> macro to use the first of gconvert, gcvt, or sprintf |
| 1449 | that pass sprintf-%g-like behaviour tests. If perl is using |
| 1450 | long doubles, the macro uses the first of the following |
| 1451 | functions that pass Configure's tests: qgcvt, sprintf (if |
| 1452 | Configure knows how to make sprintf format long doubles--see |
| 1453 | sPRIgldbl), gconvert, gcvt, and sprintf (casting to double). |
| 1454 | The gconvert_preference and gconvert_ld_preference variables |
| 1455 | can be used to alter Configure's preferences, for doubles and |
| 1456 | long doubles, respectively. If present, they contain a |
| 1457 | space-separated list of one or more of the above function |
| 1458 | names in the order they should be tried. |
| 1459 | |
| 1460 | d_Gconvert may be set to override Configure with a platform- |
| 1461 | specific function. If this function expects a double, a |
| 1462 | different value may need to be set by the F<uselongdouble.cbu> |
| 1463 | call-back unit so that long doubles can be formatted without |
| 1464 | loss of precision. |
| 1465 | |
| 1466 | =item C<d_getcwd> |
| 1467 | |
| 1468 | From F<d_getcwd.U>: |
| 1469 | |
| 1470 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETCWD> symbol, which |
| 1471 | indicates to the C program that the getcwd() routine is available |
| 1472 | to get the current working directory. |
| 1473 | |
| 1474 | =item C<d_getespwnam> |
| 1475 | |
| 1476 | From F<d_getespwnam.U>: |
| 1477 | |
| 1478 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETESPWNAM> if getespwnam() is |
| 1479 | available to retrieve enchanced (shadow) password entries by name. |
| 1480 | |
| 1481 | =item C<d_getfsstat> |
| 1482 | |
| 1483 | From F<d_getfsstat.U>: |
| 1484 | |
| 1485 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETFSSTAT> symbol, which |
| 1486 | indicates to the C program that the getfsstat() routine is available. |
| 1487 | |
| 1488 | =item C<d_getgrent> |
| 1489 | |
| 1490 | From F<d_getgrent.U>: |
| 1491 | |
| 1492 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGRENT> symbol, which |
| 1493 | indicates to the C program that the getgrent() routine is available |
| 1494 | for sequential access of the group database. |
| 1495 | |
| 1496 | =item C<d_getgrent_r> |
| 1497 | |
| 1498 | From F<d_getgrent_r.U>: |
| 1499 | |
| 1500 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGRENT_R> symbol, |
| 1501 | which indicates to the C program that the getgrent_r() |
| 1502 | routine is available. |
| 1503 | |
| 1504 | =item C<d_getgrgid_r> |
| 1505 | |
| 1506 | From F<d_getgrgid_r.U>: |
| 1507 | |
| 1508 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGRGID_R> symbol, |
| 1509 | which indicates to the C program that the getgrgid_r() |
| 1510 | routine is available. |
| 1511 | |
| 1512 | =item C<d_getgrnam_r> |
| 1513 | |
| 1514 | From F<d_getgrnam_r.U>: |
| 1515 | |
| 1516 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGRNAM_R> symbol, |
| 1517 | which indicates to the C program that the getgrnam_r() |
| 1518 | routine is available. |
| 1519 | |
| 1520 | =item C<d_getgrps> |
| 1521 | |
| 1522 | From F<d_getgrps.U>: |
| 1523 | |
| 1524 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETGROUPS> symbol, which |
| 1525 | indicates to the C program that the getgroups() routine is available |
| 1526 | to get the list of process groups. |
| 1527 | |
| 1528 | =item C<d_gethbyaddr> |
| 1529 | |
| 1530 | From F<d_gethbyad.U>: |
| 1531 | |
| 1532 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTBYADDR> symbol, which |
| 1533 | indicates to the C program that the gethostbyaddr() routine is available |
| 1534 | to look up hosts by their C<IP> addresses. |
| 1535 | |
| 1536 | =item C<d_gethbyname> |
| 1537 | |
| 1538 | From F<d_gethbynm.U>: |
| 1539 | |
| 1540 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTBYNAME> symbol, which |
| 1541 | indicates to the C program that the gethostbyname() routine is available |
| 1542 | to look up host names in some data base or other. |
| 1543 | |
| 1544 | =item C<d_gethent> |
| 1545 | |
| 1546 | From F<d_gethent.U>: |
| 1547 | |
| 1548 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETHOSTENT> if gethostent() is |
| 1549 | available to look up host names in some data base or another. |
| 1550 | |
| 1551 | =item C<d_gethname> |
| 1552 | |
| 1553 | From F<d_gethname.U>: |
| 1554 | |
| 1555 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTNAME> symbol, which |
| 1556 | indicates to the C program that the gethostname() routine may be |
| 1557 | used to derive the host name. |
| 1558 | |
| 1559 | =item C<d_gethostbyaddr_r> |
| 1560 | |
| 1561 | From F<d_gethostbyaddr_r.U>: |
| 1562 | |
| 1563 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTBYADDR_R> symbol, |
| 1564 | which indicates to the C program that the gethostbyaddr_r() |
| 1565 | routine is available. |
| 1566 | |
| 1567 | =item C<d_gethostbyname_r> |
| 1568 | |
| 1569 | From F<d_gethostbyname_r.U>: |
| 1570 | |
| 1571 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTBYNAME_R> symbol, |
| 1572 | which indicates to the C program that the gethostbyname_r() |
| 1573 | routine is available. |
| 1574 | |
| 1575 | =item C<d_gethostent_r> |
| 1576 | |
| 1577 | From F<d_gethostent_r.U>: |
| 1578 | |
| 1579 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOSTENT_R> symbol, |
| 1580 | which indicates to the C program that the gethostent_r() |
| 1581 | routine is available. |
| 1582 | |
| 1583 | =item C<d_gethostprotos> |
| 1584 | |
| 1585 | From F<d_gethostprotos.U>: |
| 1586 | |
| 1587 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETHOST_PROTOS> symbol, |
| 1588 | which indicates to the C program that <netdb.h> supplies |
| 1589 | prototypes for the various gethost*() functions. |
| 1590 | See also F<netdbtype.U> for probing for various netdb types. |
| 1591 | |
| 1592 | =item C<d_getitimer> |
| 1593 | |
| 1594 | From F<d_getitimer.U>: |
| 1595 | |
| 1596 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETITIMER> symbol, which |
| 1597 | indicates to the C program that the getitimer() routine is available. |
| 1598 | |
| 1599 | =item C<d_getlogin> |
| 1600 | |
| 1601 | From F<d_getlogin.U>: |
| 1602 | |
| 1603 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETLOGIN> symbol, which |
| 1604 | indicates to the C program that the getlogin() routine is available |
| 1605 | to get the login name. |
| 1606 | |
| 1607 | =item C<d_getlogin_r> |
| 1608 | |
| 1609 | From F<d_getlogin_r.U>: |
| 1610 | |
| 1611 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETLOGIN_R> symbol, |
| 1612 | which indicates to the C program that the getlogin_r() |
| 1613 | routine is available. |
| 1614 | |
| 1615 | =item C<d_getmnt> |
| 1616 | |
| 1617 | From F<d_getmnt.U>: |
| 1618 | |
| 1619 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETMNT> symbol, which |
| 1620 | indicates to the C program that the getmnt() routine is available |
| 1621 | to retrieve one or more mount info blocks by filename. |
| 1622 | |
| 1623 | =item C<d_getmntent> |
| 1624 | |
| 1625 | From F<d_getmntent.U>: |
| 1626 | |
| 1627 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETMNTENT> symbol, which |
| 1628 | indicates to the C program that the getmntent() routine is available |
| 1629 | to iterate through mounted files to get their mount info. |
| 1630 | |
| 1631 | =item C<d_getnbyaddr> |
| 1632 | |
| 1633 | From F<d_getnbyad.U>: |
| 1634 | |
| 1635 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETBYADDR> symbol, which |
| 1636 | indicates to the C program that the getnetbyaddr() routine is available |
| 1637 | to look up networks by their C<IP> addresses. |
| 1638 | |
| 1639 | =item C<d_getnbyname> |
| 1640 | |
| 1641 | From F<d_getnbynm.U>: |
| 1642 | |
| 1643 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETBYNAME> symbol, which |
| 1644 | indicates to the C program that the getnetbyname() routine is available |
| 1645 | to look up networks by their names. |
| 1646 | |
| 1647 | =item C<d_getnent> |
| 1648 | |
| 1649 | From F<d_getnent.U>: |
| 1650 | |
| 1651 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETNETENT> if getnetent() is |
| 1652 | available to look up network names in some data base or another. |
| 1653 | |
| 1654 | =item C<d_getnetbyaddr_r> |
| 1655 | |
| 1656 | From F<d_getnetbyaddr_r.U>: |
| 1657 | |
| 1658 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETBYADDR_R> symbol, |
| 1659 | which indicates to the C program that the getnetbyaddr_r() |
| 1660 | routine is available. |
| 1661 | |
| 1662 | =item C<d_getnetbyname_r> |
| 1663 | |
| 1664 | From F<d_getnetbyname_r.U>: |
| 1665 | |
| 1666 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETBYNAME_R> symbol, |
| 1667 | which indicates to the C program that the getnetbyname_r() |
| 1668 | routine is available. |
| 1669 | |
| 1670 | =item C<d_getnetent_r> |
| 1671 | |
| 1672 | From F<d_getnetent_r.U>: |
| 1673 | |
| 1674 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNETENT_R> symbol, |
| 1675 | which indicates to the C program that the getnetent_r() |
| 1676 | routine is available. |
| 1677 | |
| 1678 | =item C<d_getnetprotos> |
| 1679 | |
| 1680 | From F<d_getnetprotos.U>: |
| 1681 | |
| 1682 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETNET_PROTOS> symbol, |
| 1683 | which indicates to the C program that <netdb.h> supplies |
| 1684 | prototypes for the various getnet*() functions. |
| 1685 | See also F<netdbtype.U> for probing for various netdb types. |
| 1686 | |
| 1687 | =item C<d_getpagsz> |
| 1688 | |
| 1689 | From F<d_getpagsz.U>: |
| 1690 | |
| 1691 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPAGESIZE> if getpagesize() |
| 1692 | is available to get the system page size. |
| 1693 | |
| 1694 | =item C<d_getpbyname> |
| 1695 | |
| 1696 | From F<d_getprotby.U>: |
| 1697 | |
| 1698 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOBYNAME> |
| 1699 | symbol, which indicates to the C program that the |
| 1700 | getprotobyname() routine is available to look up protocols |
| 1701 | by their name. |
| 1702 | |
| 1703 | =item C<d_getpbynumber> |
| 1704 | |
| 1705 | From F<d_getprotby.U>: |
| 1706 | |
| 1707 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOBYNUMBER> |
| 1708 | symbol, which indicates to the C program that the |
| 1709 | getprotobynumber() routine is available to look up protocols |
| 1710 | by their number. |
| 1711 | |
| 1712 | =item C<d_getpent> |
| 1713 | |
| 1714 | From F<d_getpent.U>: |
| 1715 | |
| 1716 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPROTOENT> if getprotoent() is |
| 1717 | available to look up protocols in some data base or another. |
| 1718 | |
| 1719 | =item C<d_getpgid> |
| 1720 | |
| 1721 | From F<d_getpgid.U>: |
| 1722 | |
| 1723 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPGID> symbol, which |
| 1724 | indicates to the C program that the getpgid(pid) function |
| 1725 | is available to get the process group id. |
| 1726 | |
| 1727 | =item C<d_getpgrp2> |
| 1728 | |
| 1729 | From F<d_getpgrp2.U>: |
| 1730 | |
| 1731 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_GETPGRP2 symbol, which |
| 1732 | indicates to the C program that the getpgrp2() (as in F<DG/C<UX>>) routine |
| 1733 | is available to get the current process group. |
| 1734 | |
| 1735 | =item C<d_getpgrp> |
| 1736 | |
| 1737 | From F<d_getpgrp.U>: |
| 1738 | |
| 1739 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPGRP> if getpgrp() is |
| 1740 | available to get the current process group. |
| 1741 | |
| 1742 | =item C<d_getppid> |
| 1743 | |
| 1744 | From F<d_getppid.U>: |
| 1745 | |
| 1746 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPPID> symbol, which |
| 1747 | indicates to the C program that the getppid() routine is available |
| 1748 | to get the parent process C<ID>. |
| 1749 | |
| 1750 | =item C<d_getprior> |
| 1751 | |
| 1752 | From F<d_getprior.U>: |
| 1753 | |
| 1754 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPRIORITY> if getpriority() |
| 1755 | is available to get a process's priority. |
| 1756 | |
| 1757 | =item C<d_getprotobyname_r> |
| 1758 | |
| 1759 | From F<d_getprotobyname_r.U>: |
| 1760 | |
| 1761 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOBYNAME_R> symbol, |
| 1762 | which indicates to the C program that the getprotobyname_r() |
| 1763 | routine is available. |
| 1764 | |
| 1765 | =item C<d_getprotobynumber_r> |
| 1766 | |
| 1767 | From F<d_getprotobynumber_r.U>: |
| 1768 | |
| 1769 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOBYNUMBER_R> symbol, |
| 1770 | which indicates to the C program that the getprotobynumber_r() |
| 1771 | routine is available. |
| 1772 | |
| 1773 | =item C<d_getprotoent_r> |
| 1774 | |
| 1775 | From F<d_getprotoent_r.U>: |
| 1776 | |
| 1777 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTOENT_R> symbol, |
| 1778 | which indicates to the C program that the getprotoent_r() |
| 1779 | routine is available. |
| 1780 | |
| 1781 | =item C<d_getprotoprotos> |
| 1782 | |
| 1783 | From F<d_getprotoprotos.U>: |
| 1784 | |
| 1785 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPROTO_PROTOS> symbol, |
| 1786 | which indicates to the C program that <netdb.h> supplies |
| 1787 | prototypes for the various getproto*() functions. |
| 1788 | See also F<netdbtype.U> for probing for various netdb types. |
| 1789 | |
| 1790 | =item C<d_getprpwnam> |
| 1791 | |
| 1792 | From F<d_getprpwnam.U>: |
| 1793 | |
| 1794 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETPRPWNAM> if getprpwnam() is |
| 1795 | available to retrieve protected (shadow) password entries by name. |
| 1796 | |
| 1797 | =item C<d_getpwent> |
| 1798 | |
| 1799 | From F<d_getpwent.U>: |
| 1800 | |
| 1801 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPWENT> symbol, which |
| 1802 | indicates to the C program that the getpwent() routine is available |
| 1803 | for sequential access of the passwd database. |
| 1804 | |
| 1805 | =item C<d_getpwent_r> |
| 1806 | |
| 1807 | From F<d_getpwent_r.U>: |
| 1808 | |
| 1809 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPWENT_R> symbol, |
| 1810 | which indicates to the C program that the getpwent_r() |
| 1811 | routine is available. |
| 1812 | |
| 1813 | =item C<d_getpwnam_r> |
| 1814 | |
| 1815 | From F<d_getpwnam_r.U>: |
| 1816 | |
| 1817 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPWNAM_R> symbol, |
| 1818 | which indicates to the C program that the getpwnam_r() |
| 1819 | routine is available. |
| 1820 | |
| 1821 | =item C<d_getpwuid_r> |
| 1822 | |
| 1823 | From F<d_getpwuid_r.U>: |
| 1824 | |
| 1825 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETPWUID_R> symbol, |
| 1826 | which indicates to the C program that the getpwuid_r() |
| 1827 | routine is available. |
| 1828 | |
| 1829 | =item C<d_getsbyname> |
| 1830 | |
| 1831 | From F<d_getsrvby.U>: |
| 1832 | |
| 1833 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVBYNAME> |
| 1834 | symbol, which indicates to the C program that the |
| 1835 | getservbyname() routine is available to look up services |
| 1836 | by their name. |
| 1837 | |
| 1838 | =item C<d_getsbyport> |
| 1839 | |
| 1840 | From F<d_getsrvby.U>: |
| 1841 | |
| 1842 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVBYPORT> |
| 1843 | symbol, which indicates to the C program that the |
| 1844 | getservbyport() routine is available to look up services |
| 1845 | by their port. |
| 1846 | |
| 1847 | =item C<d_getsent> |
| 1848 | |
| 1849 | From F<d_getsent.U>: |
| 1850 | |
| 1851 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETSERVENT> if getservent() is |
| 1852 | available to look up network services in some data base or another. |
| 1853 | |
| 1854 | =item C<d_getservbyname_r> |
| 1855 | |
| 1856 | From F<d_getservbyname_r.U>: |
| 1857 | |
| 1858 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVBYNAME_R> symbol, |
| 1859 | which indicates to the C program that the getservbyname_r() |
| 1860 | routine is available. |
| 1861 | |
| 1862 | =item C<d_getservbyport_r> |
| 1863 | |
| 1864 | From F<d_getservbyport_r.U>: |
| 1865 | |
| 1866 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVBYPORT_R> symbol, |
| 1867 | which indicates to the C program that the getservbyport_r() |
| 1868 | routine is available. |
| 1869 | |
| 1870 | =item C<d_getservent_r> |
| 1871 | |
| 1872 | From F<d_getservent_r.U>: |
| 1873 | |
| 1874 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERVENT_R> symbol, |
| 1875 | which indicates to the C program that the getservent_r() |
| 1876 | routine is available. |
| 1877 | |
| 1878 | =item C<d_getservprotos> |
| 1879 | |
| 1880 | From F<d_getservprotos.U>: |
| 1881 | |
| 1882 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSERV_PROTOS> symbol, |
| 1883 | which indicates to the C program that <netdb.h> supplies |
| 1884 | prototypes for the various getserv*() functions. |
| 1885 | See also F<netdbtype.U> for probing for various netdb types. |
| 1886 | |
| 1887 | =item C<d_getspnam> |
| 1888 | |
| 1889 | From F<d_getspnam.U>: |
| 1890 | |
| 1891 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_GETSPNAM> if getspnam() is |
| 1892 | available to retrieve SysV shadow password entries by name. |
| 1893 | |
| 1894 | =item C<d_getspnam_r> |
| 1895 | |
| 1896 | From F<d_getspnam_r.U>: |
| 1897 | |
| 1898 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETSPNAM_R> symbol, |
| 1899 | which indicates to the C program that the getspnam_r() |
| 1900 | routine is available. |
| 1901 | |
| 1902 | =item C<d_gettimeod> |
| 1903 | |
| 1904 | From F<d_ftime.U>: |
| 1905 | |
| 1906 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GETTIMEOFDAY> symbol, which |
| 1907 | indicates that the gettimeofday() system call exists (to obtain a |
| 1908 | sub-second accuracy clock). You should probably include <sys/resource.h>. |
| 1909 | |
| 1910 | =item C<d_gmtime_r> |
| 1911 | |
| 1912 | From F<d_gmtime_r.U>: |
| 1913 | |
| 1914 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_GMTIME_R> symbol, |
| 1915 | which indicates to the C program that the gmtime_r() |
| 1916 | routine is available. |
| 1917 | |
| 1918 | =item C<d_gnulibc> |
| 1919 | |
| 1920 | From F<d_gnulibc.U>: |
| 1921 | |
| 1922 | Defined if we're dealing with the C<GNU> C Library. |
| 1923 | |
| 1924 | =item C<d_grpasswd> |
| 1925 | |
| 1926 | From F<i_grp.U>: |
| 1927 | |
| 1928 | This variable conditionally defines C<GRPASSWD>, which indicates |
| 1929 | that struct group in <grp.h> contains gr_passwd. |
| 1930 | |
| 1931 | =item C<d_hasmntopt> |
| 1932 | |
| 1933 | From F<d_hasmntopt.U>: |
| 1934 | |
| 1935 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_HASMNTOPT> symbol, which |
| 1936 | indicates to the C program that the hasmntopt() routine is available |
| 1937 | to query the mount options of file systems. |
| 1938 | |
| 1939 | =item C<d_htonl> |
| 1940 | |
| 1941 | From F<d_htonl.U>: |
| 1942 | |
| 1943 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_HTONL> if htonl() and its |
| 1944 | friends are available to do network order byte swapping. |
| 1945 | |
| 1946 | =item C<d_ilogbl> |
| 1947 | |
| 1948 | From F<d_ilogbl.U>: |
| 1949 | |
| 1950 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ILOGBL> symbol, which |
| 1951 | indicates to the C program that the ilogbl() routine is available. |
| 1952 | If scalbnl is also present we can emulate frexpl. |
| 1953 | |
| 1954 | =item C<d_index> |
| 1955 | |
| 1956 | From F<d_strchr.U>: |
| 1957 | |
| 1958 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_INDEX> if index() and |
| 1959 | rindex() are available for string searching. |
| 1960 | |
| 1961 | =item C<d_inetaton> |
| 1962 | |
| 1963 | From F<d_inetaton.U>: |
| 1964 | |
| 1965 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_INET_ATON> symbol, which |
| 1966 | indicates to the C program that the inet_aton() function is available |
| 1967 | to parse C<IP> address C<dotted-quad> strings. |
| 1968 | |
| 1969 | =item C<d_int64_t> |
| 1970 | |
| 1971 | From F<d_int64_t.U>: |
| 1972 | |
| 1973 | This symbol will be defined if the C compiler supports int64_t. |
| 1974 | |
| 1975 | =item C<d_isascii> |
| 1976 | |
| 1977 | From F<d_isascii.U>: |
| 1978 | |
| 1979 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISASCII> constant, |
| 1980 | which indicates to the C program that isascii() is available. |
| 1981 | |
| 1982 | =item C<d_isfinite> |
| 1983 | |
| 1984 | From F<d_isfinite.U>: |
| 1985 | |
| 1986 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISFINITE> symbol, which |
| 1987 | indicates to the C program that the isfinite() routine is available. |
| 1988 | |
| 1989 | =item C<d_isinf> |
| 1990 | |
| 1991 | From F<d_isinf.U>: |
| 1992 | |
| 1993 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISINF> symbol, which |
| 1994 | indicates to the C program that the isinf() routine is available. |
| 1995 | |
| 1996 | =item C<d_isnan> |
| 1997 | |
| 1998 | From F<d_isnan.U>: |
| 1999 | |
| 2000 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISNAN> symbol, which |
| 2001 | indicates to the C program that the isnan() routine is available. |
| 2002 | |
| 2003 | =item C<d_isnanl> |
| 2004 | |
| 2005 | From F<d_isnanl.U>: |
| 2006 | |
| 2007 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_ISNANL> symbol, which |
| 2008 | indicates to the C program that the isnanl() routine is available. |
| 2009 | |
| 2010 | =item C<d_killpg> |
| 2011 | |
| 2012 | From F<d_killpg.U>: |
| 2013 | |
| 2014 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_KILLPG> symbol, which |
| 2015 | indicates to the C program that the killpg() routine is available |
| 2016 | to kill process groups. |
| 2017 | |
| 2018 | =item C<d_lchown> |
| 2019 | |
| 2020 | From F<d_lchown.U>: |
| 2021 | |
| 2022 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_LCHOWN> symbol, which |
| 2023 | indicates to the C program that the lchown() routine is available |
| 2024 | to operate on a symbolic link (instead of following the link). |
| 2025 | |
| 2026 | =item C<d_ldbl_dig> |
| 2027 | |
| 2028 | From F<d_ldbl_dig.U>: |
| 2029 | |
| 2030 | This variable conditionally defines d_ldbl_dig if this system's |
| 2031 | header files provide C<LDBL_DIG>, which is the number of significant |
| 2032 | digits in a long double precision number. |
| 2033 | |
| 2034 | =item C<d_link> |
| 2035 | |
| 2036 | From F<d_link.U>: |
| 2037 | |
| 2038 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LINK> if link() is |
| 2039 | available to create hard links. |
| 2040 | |
| 2041 | =item C<d_localtime_r> |
| 2042 | |
| 2043 | From F<d_localtime_r.U>: |
| 2044 | |
| 2045 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_LOCALTIME_R> symbol, |
| 2046 | which indicates to the C program that the localtime_r() |
| 2047 | routine is available. |
| 2048 | |
| 2049 | =item C<d_locconv> |
| 2050 | |
| 2051 | From F<d_locconv.U>: |
| 2052 | |
| 2053 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LOCALECONV> if localeconv() is |
| 2054 | available for numeric and monetary formatting conventions. |
| 2055 | |
| 2056 | =item C<d_lockf> |
| 2057 | |
| 2058 | From F<d_lockf.U>: |
| 2059 | |
| 2060 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LOCKF> if lockf() is |
| 2061 | available to do file locking. |
| 2062 | |
| 2063 | =item C<d_longdbl> |
| 2064 | |
| 2065 | From F<d_longdbl.U>: |
| 2066 | |
| 2067 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LONG_DOUBLE> if |
| 2068 | the long double type is supported. |
| 2069 | |
| 2070 | =item C<d_longlong> |
| 2071 | |
| 2072 | From F<d_longlong.U>: |
| 2073 | |
| 2074 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LONG_LONG> if |
| 2075 | the long long type is supported. |
| 2076 | |
| 2077 | =item C<d_lseekproto> |
| 2078 | |
| 2079 | From F<d_lseekproto.U>: |
| 2080 | |
| 2081 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_LSEEK_PROTO> symbol, |
| 2082 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides |
| 2083 | a prototype for the lseek() function. Otherwise, it is |
| 2084 | up to the program to supply one. |
| 2085 | |
| 2086 | =item C<d_lstat> |
| 2087 | |
| 2088 | From F<d_lstat.U>: |
| 2089 | |
| 2090 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_LSTAT> if lstat() is |
| 2091 | available to do file stats on symbolic links. |
| 2092 | |
| 2093 | =item C<d_madvise> |
| 2094 | |
| 2095 | From F<d_madvise.U>: |
| 2096 | |
| 2097 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MADVISE> if madvise() is |
| 2098 | available to map a file into memory. |
| 2099 | |
| 2100 | =item C<d_malloc_size> |
| 2101 | |
| 2102 | From F<d_malloc_size.U>: |
| 2103 | |
| 2104 | This symbol, if defined, indicates that the malloc_size |
| 2105 | routine is available for use. |
| 2106 | |
| 2107 | =item C<d_malloc_good_size> |
| 2108 | |
| 2109 | From F<d_malloc_good_size.U>: |
| 2110 | |
| 2111 | This symbol, if defined, indicates that the malloc_good_size |
| 2112 | routine is available for use. |
| 2113 | |
| 2114 | =item C<d_mblen> |
| 2115 | |
| 2116 | From F<d_mblen.U>: |
| 2117 | |
| 2118 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MBLEN> symbol, which |
| 2119 | indicates to the C program that the mblen() routine is available |
| 2120 | to find the number of bytes in a multibye character. |
| 2121 | |
| 2122 | =item C<d_mbstowcs> |
| 2123 | |
| 2124 | From F<d_mbstowcs.U>: |
| 2125 | |
| 2126 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MBSTOWCS> symbol, which |
| 2127 | indicates to the C program that the mbstowcs() routine is available |
| 2128 | to convert a multibyte string into a wide character string. |
| 2129 | |
| 2130 | =item C<d_mbtowc> |
| 2131 | |
| 2132 | From F<d_mbtowc.U>: |
| 2133 | |
| 2134 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MBTOWC> symbol, which |
| 2135 | indicates to the C program that the mbtowc() routine is available |
| 2136 | to convert multibyte to a wide character. |
| 2137 | |
| 2138 | =item C<d_memchr> |
| 2139 | |
| 2140 | From F<d_memchr.U>: |
| 2141 | |
| 2142 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMCHR> symbol, which |
| 2143 | indicates to the C program that the memchr() routine is available |
| 2144 | to locate characters within a C string. |
| 2145 | |
| 2146 | =item C<d_memcmp> |
| 2147 | |
| 2148 | From F<d_memcmp.U>: |
| 2149 | |
| 2150 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMCMP> symbol, which |
| 2151 | indicates to the C program that the memcmp() routine is available |
| 2152 | to compare blocks of memory. |
| 2153 | |
| 2154 | =item C<d_memcpy> |
| 2155 | |
| 2156 | From F<d_memcpy.U>: |
| 2157 | |
| 2158 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMCPY> symbol, which |
| 2159 | indicates to the C program that the memcpy() routine is available |
| 2160 | to copy blocks of memory. |
| 2161 | |
| 2162 | =item C<d_memmove> |
| 2163 | |
| 2164 | From F<d_memmove.U>: |
| 2165 | |
| 2166 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMMOVE> symbol, which |
| 2167 | indicates to the C program that the memmove() routine is available |
| 2168 | to copy potentatially overlapping blocks of memory. |
| 2169 | |
| 2170 | =item C<d_memset> |
| 2171 | |
| 2172 | From F<d_memset.U>: |
| 2173 | |
| 2174 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MEMSET> symbol, which |
| 2175 | indicates to the C program that the memset() routine is available |
| 2176 | to set blocks of memory. |
| 2177 | |
| 2178 | =item C<d_mkdir> |
| 2179 | |
| 2180 | From F<d_mkdir.U>: |
| 2181 | |
| 2182 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKDIR> symbol, which |
| 2183 | indicates to the C program that the mkdir() routine is available |
| 2184 | to create F<directories.>. |
| 2185 | |
| 2186 | =item C<d_mkdtemp> |
| 2187 | |
| 2188 | From F<d_mkdtemp.U>: |
| 2189 | |
| 2190 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKDTEMP> symbol, which |
| 2191 | indicates to the C program that the mkdtemp() routine is available |
| 2192 | to exclusively create a uniquely named temporary directory. |
| 2193 | |
| 2194 | =item C<d_mkfifo> |
| 2195 | |
| 2196 | From F<d_mkfifo.U>: |
| 2197 | |
| 2198 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKFIFO> symbol, which |
| 2199 | indicates to the C program that the mkfifo() routine is available. |
| 2200 | |
| 2201 | =item C<d_mkstemp> |
| 2202 | |
| 2203 | From F<d_mkstemp.U>: |
| 2204 | |
| 2205 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKSTEMP> symbol, which |
| 2206 | indicates to the C program that the mkstemp() routine is available |
| 2207 | to exclusively create and open a uniquely named temporary file. |
| 2208 | |
| 2209 | =item C<d_mkstemps> |
| 2210 | |
| 2211 | From F<d_mkstemps.U>: |
| 2212 | |
| 2213 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKSTEMPS> symbol, which |
| 2214 | indicates to the C program that the mkstemps() routine is available |
| 2215 | to exclusively create and open a uniquely named (with a suffix) |
| 2216 | temporary file. |
| 2217 | |
| 2218 | =item C<d_mktime> |
| 2219 | |
| 2220 | From F<d_mktime.U>: |
| 2221 | |
| 2222 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MKTIME> symbol, which |
| 2223 | indicates to the C program that the mktime() routine is available. |
| 2224 | |
| 2225 | =item C<d_mmap> |
| 2226 | |
| 2227 | From F<d_mmap.U>: |
| 2228 | |
| 2229 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MMAP> if mmap() is |
| 2230 | available to map a file into memory. |
| 2231 | |
| 2232 | =item C<d_modfl> |
| 2233 | |
| 2234 | From F<d_modfl.U>: |
| 2235 | |
| 2236 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MODFL> symbol, which |
| 2237 | indicates to the C program that the modfl() routine is available. |
| 2238 | |
| 2239 | =item C<d_modfl_pow32_bug> |
| 2240 | |
| 2241 | From F<d_modfl.U>: |
| 2242 | |
| 2243 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_MODFL_POW32_BUG symbol, |
| 2244 | which indicates that modfl() is broken for long doubles >= pow(2, 32). |
| 2245 | For example from 4294967303.150000 one would get 4294967302.000000 |
| 2246 | and 1.150000. The bug has been seen in certain versions of glibc, |
| 2247 | release 2.2.2 is known to be okay. |
| 2248 | |
| 2249 | =item C<d_modflproto> |
| 2250 | |
| 2251 | From F<d_modfl.U>: |
| 2252 | |
| 2253 | This symbol, if defined, indicates that the system provides |
| 2254 | a prototype for the modfl() function. Otherwise, it is up |
| 2255 | to the program to supply one. C99 says it should be |
| 2256 | long double modfl(long double, long double *); |
| 2257 | |
| 2258 | =item C<d_mprotect> |
| 2259 | |
| 2260 | From F<d_mprotect.U>: |
| 2261 | |
| 2262 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MPROTECT> if mprotect() is |
| 2263 | available to modify the access protection of a memory mapped file. |
| 2264 | |
| 2265 | =item C<d_msg> |
| 2266 | |
| 2267 | From F<d_msg.U>: |
| 2268 | |
| 2269 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG> symbol, which |
| 2270 | indicates that the entire msg*(2) library is present. |
| 2271 | |
| 2272 | =item C<d_msg_ctrunc> |
| 2273 | |
| 2274 | From F<d_socket.U>: |
| 2275 | |
| 2276 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_CTRUNC> symbol, |
| 2277 | which indicates that the C<MSG_CTRUNC> is available. #ifdef is |
| 2278 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this. |
| 2279 | |
| 2280 | =item C<d_msg_dontroute> |
| 2281 | |
| 2282 | From F<d_socket.U>: |
| 2283 | |
| 2284 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_DONTROUTE> symbol, |
| 2285 | which indicates that the C<MSG_DONTROUTE> is available. #ifdef is |
| 2286 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this. |
| 2287 | |
| 2288 | =item C<d_msg_oob> |
| 2289 | |
| 2290 | From F<d_socket.U>: |
| 2291 | |
| 2292 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_OOB> symbol, |
| 2293 | which indicates that the C<MSG_OOB> is available. #ifdef is |
| 2294 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this. |
| 2295 | |
| 2296 | =item C<d_msg_peek> |
| 2297 | |
| 2298 | From F<d_socket.U>: |
| 2299 | |
| 2300 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_PEEK> symbol, |
| 2301 | which indicates that the C<MSG_PEEK> is available. #ifdef is |
| 2302 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this. |
| 2303 | |
| 2304 | =item C<d_msg_proxy> |
| 2305 | |
| 2306 | From F<d_socket.U>: |
| 2307 | |
| 2308 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSG_PROXY> symbol, |
| 2309 | which indicates that the C<MSG_PROXY> is available. #ifdef is |
| 2310 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this. |
| 2311 | |
| 2312 | =item C<d_msgctl> |
| 2313 | |
| 2314 | From F<d_msgctl.U>: |
| 2315 | |
| 2316 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSGCTL> symbol, which |
| 2317 | indicates to the C program that the msgctl() routine is available. |
| 2318 | |
| 2319 | =item C<d_msgget> |
| 2320 | |
| 2321 | From F<d_msgget.U>: |
| 2322 | |
| 2323 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSGGET> symbol, which |
| 2324 | indicates to the C program that the msgget() routine is available. |
| 2325 | |
| 2326 | =item C<d_msghdr_s> |
| 2327 | |
| 2328 | From F<d_msghdr_s.U>: |
| 2329 | |
| 2330 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_MSGHDR> symbol, |
| 2331 | which indicates that the struct msghdr is supported. |
| 2332 | |
| 2333 | =item C<d_msgrcv> |
| 2334 | |
| 2335 | From F<d_msgrcv.U>: |
| 2336 | |
| 2337 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSGRCV> symbol, which |
| 2338 | indicates to the C program that the msgrcv() routine is available. |
| 2339 | |
| 2340 | =item C<d_msgsnd> |
| 2341 | |
| 2342 | From F<d_msgsnd.U>: |
| 2343 | |
| 2344 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_MSGSND> symbol, which |
| 2345 | indicates to the C program that the msgsnd() routine is available. |
| 2346 | |
| 2347 | =item C<d_msync> |
| 2348 | |
| 2349 | From F<d_msync.U>: |
| 2350 | |
| 2351 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MSYNC> if msync() is |
| 2352 | available to synchronize a mapped file. |
| 2353 | |
| 2354 | =item C<d_munmap> |
| 2355 | |
| 2356 | From F<d_munmap.U>: |
| 2357 | |
| 2358 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_MUNMAP> if munmap() is |
| 2359 | available to unmap a region mapped by mmap(). |
| 2360 | |
| 2361 | =item C<d_mymalloc> |
| 2362 | |
| 2363 | From F<mallocsrc.U>: |
| 2364 | |
| 2365 | This variable conditionally defines C<MYMALLOC> in case other parts |
| 2366 | of the source want to take special action if C<MYMALLOC> is used. |
| 2367 | This may include different sorts of profiling or error detection. |
| 2368 | |
| 2369 | =item C<d_nanosleep> |
| 2370 | |
| 2371 | From F<d_nanosleep.U>: |
| 2372 | |
| 2373 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_NANOSLEEP> |
| 2374 | if nanosleep() is available to sleep with 1E-9 sec accuracy. |
| 2375 | |
| 2376 | =item C<d_nice> |
| 2377 | |
| 2378 | From F<d_nice.U>: |
| 2379 | |
| 2380 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_NICE> symbol, which |
| 2381 | indicates to the C program that the nice() routine is available. |
| 2382 | |
| 2383 | =item C<d_nl_langinfo> |
| 2384 | |
| 2385 | From F<d_nl_langinfo.U>: |
| 2386 | |
| 2387 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_NL_LANGINFO> symbol, which |
| 2388 | indicates to the C program that the nl_langinfo() routine is available. |
| 2389 | |
| 2390 | =item C<d_nv_preserves_uv> |
| 2391 | |
| 2392 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 2393 | |
| 2394 | This variable indicates whether a variable of type nvtype |
| 2395 | can preserve all the bits a variable of type uvtype. |
| 2396 | |
| 2397 | =item C<d_nv_zero_is_allbits_zero> |
| 2398 | |
| 2399 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 2400 | |
| 2401 | This variable indicates whether a variable of type nvtype |
| 2402 | stores 0.0 in memory as all bits zero. |
| 2403 | |
| 2404 | =item C<d_off64_t> |
| 2405 | |
| 2406 | From F<d_off64_t.U>: |
| 2407 | |
| 2408 | This symbol will be defined if the C compiler supports off64_t. |
| 2409 | |
| 2410 | =item C<d_old_pthread_create_joinable> |
| 2411 | |
| 2412 | From F<d_pthrattrj.U>: |
| 2413 | |
| 2414 | This variable conditionally defines pthread_create_joinable. |
| 2415 | undef if F<pthread.h> defines C<PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE>. |
| 2416 | |
| 2417 | =item C<d_oldpthreads> |
| 2418 | |
| 2419 | From F<usethreads.U>: |
| 2420 | |
| 2421 | This variable conditionally defines the C<OLD_PTHREADS_API> symbol, |
| 2422 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use the old |
| 2423 | draft C<POSIX> threads C<API>. This is only potentially meaningful if |
| 2424 | usethreads is set. |
| 2425 | |
| 2426 | =item C<d_oldsock> |
| 2427 | |
| 2428 | From F<d_socket.U>: |
| 2429 | |
| 2430 | This variable conditionally defines the C<OLDSOCKET> symbol, which |
| 2431 | indicates that the C<BSD> socket interface is based on 4.1c and not 4.2. |
| 2432 | |
| 2433 | =item C<d_open3> |
| 2434 | |
| 2435 | From F<d_open3.U>: |
| 2436 | |
| 2437 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_OPEN3 manifest constant, |
| 2438 | which indicates to the C program that the 3 argument version of |
| 2439 | the open(2) function is available. |
| 2440 | |
| 2441 | =item C<d_pathconf> |
| 2442 | |
| 2443 | From F<d_pathconf.U>: |
| 2444 | |
| 2445 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PATHCONF> symbol, which |
| 2446 | indicates to the C program that the pathconf() routine is available |
| 2447 | to determine file-system related limits and options associated |
| 2448 | with a given filename. |
| 2449 | |
| 2450 | =item C<d_pause> |
| 2451 | |
| 2452 | From F<d_pause.U>: |
| 2453 | |
| 2454 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PAUSE> symbol, which |
| 2455 | indicates to the C program that the pause() routine is available |
| 2456 | to suspend a process until a signal is received. |
| 2457 | |
| 2458 | =item C<d_perl_otherlibdirs> |
| 2459 | |
| 2460 | From F<otherlibdirs.U>: |
| 2461 | |
| 2462 | This variable conditionally defines C<PERL_OTHERLIBDIRS>, which |
| 2463 | contains a colon-separated set of paths for the perl binary to |
| 2464 | include in @C<INC>. See also otherlibdirs. |
| 2465 | |
| 2466 | =item C<d_phostname> |
| 2467 | |
| 2468 | From F<d_gethname.U>: |
| 2469 | |
| 2470 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PHOSTNAME> symbol, which |
| 2471 | contains the shell command which, when fed to popen(), may be |
| 2472 | used to derive the host name. |
| 2473 | |
| 2474 | =item C<d_pipe> |
| 2475 | |
| 2476 | From F<d_pipe.U>: |
| 2477 | |
| 2478 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PIPE> symbol, which |
| 2479 | indicates to the C program that the pipe() routine is available |
| 2480 | to create an inter-process channel. |
| 2481 | |
| 2482 | =item C<d_poll> |
| 2483 | |
| 2484 | From F<d_poll.U>: |
| 2485 | |
| 2486 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_POLL> symbol, which |
| 2487 | indicates to the C program that the poll() routine is available |
| 2488 | to poll active file descriptors. |
| 2489 | |
| 2490 | =item C<d_portable> |
| 2491 | |
| 2492 | From F<d_portable.U>: |
| 2493 | |
| 2494 | This variable conditionally defines the C<PORTABLE> symbol, which |
| 2495 | indicates to the C program that it should not assume that it is |
| 2496 | running on the machine it was compiled on. |
| 2497 | |
| 2498 | =item C<d_PRId64> |
| 2499 | |
| 2500 | From F<quadfio.U>: |
| 2501 | |
| 2502 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRId64 symbol, which |
| 2503 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit decimal numbers. |
| 2504 | |
| 2505 | =item C<d_PRIeldbl> |
| 2506 | |
| 2507 | From F<longdblfio.U>: |
| 2508 | |
| 2509 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which |
| 2510 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles. |
| 2511 | |
| 2512 | =item C<d_PRIEUldbl> |
| 2513 | |
| 2514 | From F<longdblfio.U>: |
| 2515 | |
| 2516 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which |
| 2517 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles. |
| 2518 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from d_PRIeldbl so that even |
| 2519 | case-blind systems can see the difference. |
| 2520 | |
| 2521 | =item C<d_PRIfldbl> |
| 2522 | |
| 2523 | From F<longdblfio.U>: |
| 2524 | |
| 2525 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which |
| 2526 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles. |
| 2527 | |
| 2528 | =item C<d_PRIFUldbl> |
| 2529 | |
| 2530 | From F<longdblfio.U>: |
| 2531 | |
| 2532 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which |
| 2533 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles. |
| 2534 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from d_PRIfldbl so that even |
| 2535 | case-blind systems can see the difference. |
| 2536 | |
| 2537 | =item C<d_PRIgldbl> |
| 2538 | |
| 2539 | From F<longdblfio.U>: |
| 2540 | |
| 2541 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which |
| 2542 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles. |
| 2543 | |
| 2544 | =item C<d_PRIGUldbl> |
| 2545 | |
| 2546 | From F<longdblfio.U>: |
| 2547 | |
| 2548 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which |
| 2549 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print long doubles. |
| 2550 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from d_PRIgldbl so that even |
| 2551 | case-blind systems can see the difference. |
| 2552 | |
| 2553 | =item C<d_PRIi64> |
| 2554 | |
| 2555 | From F<quadfio.U>: |
| 2556 | |
| 2557 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIi64 symbol, which |
| 2558 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit decimal numbers. |
| 2559 | |
| 2560 | =item C<d_PRIo64> |
| 2561 | |
| 2562 | From F<quadfio.U>: |
| 2563 | |
| 2564 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIo64 symbol, which |
| 2565 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit octal numbers. |
| 2566 | |
| 2567 | =item C<d_PRIu64> |
| 2568 | |
| 2569 | From F<quadfio.U>: |
| 2570 | |
| 2571 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIu64 symbol, which |
| 2572 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit unsigned decimal |
| 2573 | numbers. |
| 2574 | |
| 2575 | =item C<d_PRIx64> |
| 2576 | |
| 2577 | From F<quadfio.U>: |
| 2578 | |
| 2579 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIx64 symbol, which |
| 2580 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit hexadecimal numbers. |
| 2581 | |
| 2582 | =item C<d_PRIXU64> |
| 2583 | |
| 2584 | From F<quadfio.U>: |
| 2585 | |
| 2586 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIXU64 symbol, which |
| 2587 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to print 64-bit hExADECimAl numbers. |
| 2588 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from d_PRIx64 so that even |
| 2589 | case-blind systems can see the difference. |
| 2590 | |
| 2591 | =item C<d_procselfexe> |
| 2592 | |
| 2593 | From F<d_procselfexe.U>: |
| 2594 | |
| 2595 | Defined if $procselfexe is symlink to the absolute |
| 2596 | pathname of the executing program. |
| 2597 | |
| 2598 | =item C<d_pthread_atfork> |
| 2599 | |
| 2600 | From F<d_pthread_atfork.U>: |
| 2601 | |
| 2602 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PTHREAD_ATFORK> symbol, |
| 2603 | which indicates to the C program that the pthread_atfork() |
| 2604 | routine is available. |
| 2605 | |
| 2606 | =item C<d_pthread_attr_setscope> |
| 2607 | |
| 2608 | From F<d_pthread_attr_ss.U>: |
| 2609 | |
| 2610 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_PTHREAD_ATTR_SETSCOPE> if |
| 2611 | pthread_attr_setscope() is available to set the contention scope |
| 2612 | attribute of a thread attribute object. |
| 2613 | |
| 2614 | =item C<d_pthread_yield> |
| 2615 | |
| 2616 | From F<d_pthread_y.U>: |
| 2617 | |
| 2618 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_PTHREAD_YIELD> |
| 2619 | symbol if the pthread_yield routine is available to yield |
| 2620 | the execution of the current thread. |
| 2621 | |
| 2622 | =item C<d_pwage> |
| 2623 | |
| 2624 | From F<i_pwd.U>: |
| 2625 | |
| 2626 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWAGE>, which indicates |
| 2627 | that struct passwd contains pw_age. |
| 2628 | |
| 2629 | =item C<d_pwchange> |
| 2630 | |
| 2631 | From F<i_pwd.U>: |
| 2632 | |
| 2633 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWCHANGE>, which indicates |
| 2634 | that struct passwd contains pw_change. |
| 2635 | |
| 2636 | =item C<d_pwclass> |
| 2637 | |
| 2638 | From F<i_pwd.U>: |
| 2639 | |
| 2640 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWCLASS>, which indicates |
| 2641 | that struct passwd contains pw_class. |
| 2642 | |
| 2643 | =item C<d_pwcomment> |
| 2644 | |
| 2645 | From F<i_pwd.U>: |
| 2646 | |
| 2647 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWCOMMENT>, which indicates |
| 2648 | that struct passwd contains pw_comment. |
| 2649 | |
| 2650 | =item C<d_pwexpire> |
| 2651 | |
| 2652 | From F<i_pwd.U>: |
| 2653 | |
| 2654 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWEXPIRE>, which indicates |
| 2655 | that struct passwd contains pw_expire. |
| 2656 | |
| 2657 | =item C<d_pwgecos> |
| 2658 | |
| 2659 | From F<i_pwd.U>: |
| 2660 | |
| 2661 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWGECOS>, which indicates |
| 2662 | that struct passwd contains pw_gecos. |
| 2663 | |
| 2664 | =item C<d_pwpasswd> |
| 2665 | |
| 2666 | From F<i_pwd.U>: |
| 2667 | |
| 2668 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWPASSWD>, which indicates |
| 2669 | that struct passwd contains pw_passwd. |
| 2670 | |
| 2671 | =item C<d_pwquota> |
| 2672 | |
| 2673 | From F<i_pwd.U>: |
| 2674 | |
| 2675 | This variable conditionally defines C<PWQUOTA>, which indicates |
| 2676 | that struct passwd contains pw_quota. |
| 2677 | |
| 2678 | =item C<d_qgcvt> |
| 2679 | |
| 2680 | From F<d_qgcvt.U>: |
| 2681 | |
| 2682 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_QGCVT> symbol, which |
| 2683 | indicates to the C program that the qgcvt() routine is available. |
| 2684 | |
| 2685 | =item C<d_quad> |
| 2686 | |
| 2687 | From F<quadtype.U>: |
| 2688 | |
| 2689 | This variable, if defined, tells that there's a 64-bit integer type, |
| 2690 | quadtype. |
| 2691 | |
| 2692 | =item C<d_random_r> |
| 2693 | |
| 2694 | From F<d_random_r.U>: |
| 2695 | |
| 2696 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_RANDOM_R> symbol, |
| 2697 | which indicates to the C program that the random_r() |
| 2698 | routine is available. |
| 2699 | |
| 2700 | =item C<d_readdir64_r> |
| 2701 | |
| 2702 | From F<d_readdir64_r.U>: |
| 2703 | |
| 2704 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_READDIR64_R symbol, |
| 2705 | which indicates to the C program that the readdir64_r() |
| 2706 | routine is available. |
| 2707 | |
| 2708 | =item C<d_readdir> |
| 2709 | |
| 2710 | From F<d_readdir.U>: |
| 2711 | |
| 2712 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_READDIR> if readdir() is |
| 2713 | available to read directory entries. |
| 2714 | |
| 2715 | =item C<d_readdir_r> |
| 2716 | |
| 2717 | From F<d_readdir_r.U>: |
| 2718 | |
| 2719 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_READDIR_R> symbol, |
| 2720 | which indicates to the C program that the readdir_r() |
| 2721 | routine is available. |
| 2722 | |
| 2723 | =item C<d_readlink> |
| 2724 | |
| 2725 | From F<d_readlink.U>: |
| 2726 | |
| 2727 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_READLINK> symbol, which |
| 2728 | indicates to the C program that the readlink() routine is available |
| 2729 | to read the value of a symbolic link. |
| 2730 | |
| 2731 | =item C<d_readv> |
| 2732 | |
| 2733 | From F<d_readv.U>: |
| 2734 | |
| 2735 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_READV> symbol, which |
| 2736 | indicates to the C program that the readv() routine is available. |
| 2737 | |
| 2738 | =item C<d_recvmsg> |
| 2739 | |
| 2740 | From F<d_recvmsg.U>: |
| 2741 | |
| 2742 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_RECVMSG> symbol, which |
| 2743 | indicates to the C program that the recvmsg() routine is available. |
| 2744 | |
| 2745 | =item C<d_rename> |
| 2746 | |
| 2747 | From F<d_rename.U>: |
| 2748 | |
| 2749 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_RENAME> symbol, which |
| 2750 | indicates to the C program that the rename() routine is available |
| 2751 | to rename files. |
| 2752 | |
| 2753 | =item C<d_rewinddir> |
| 2754 | |
| 2755 | From F<d_readdir.U>: |
| 2756 | |
| 2757 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_REWINDDIR> if rewinddir() is |
| 2758 | available. |
| 2759 | |
| 2760 | =item C<d_rmdir> |
| 2761 | |
| 2762 | From F<d_rmdir.U>: |
| 2763 | |
| 2764 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_RMDIR> if rmdir() is |
| 2765 | available to remove directories. |
| 2766 | |
| 2767 | =item C<d_safebcpy> |
| 2768 | |
| 2769 | From F<d_safebcpy.U>: |
| 2770 | |
| 2771 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SAFE_BCOPY> symbol if |
| 2772 | the bcopy() routine can do overlapping copies. Normally, you |
| 2773 | should probably use memmove(). |
| 2774 | |
| 2775 | =item C<d_safemcpy> |
| 2776 | |
| 2777 | From F<d_safemcpy.U>: |
| 2778 | |
| 2779 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SAFE_MEMCPY> symbol if |
| 2780 | the memcpy() routine can do overlapping copies. |
| 2781 | For overlapping copies, memmove() should be used, if available. |
| 2782 | |
| 2783 | =item C<d_sanemcmp> |
| 2784 | |
| 2785 | From F<d_sanemcmp.U>: |
| 2786 | |
| 2787 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SANE_MEMCMP> symbol if |
| 2788 | the memcpy() routine is available and can be used to compare relative |
| 2789 | magnitudes of chars with their high bits set. |
| 2790 | |
| 2791 | =item C<d_sbrkproto> |
| 2792 | |
| 2793 | From F<d_sbrkproto.U>: |
| 2794 | |
| 2795 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SBRK_PROTO> symbol, |
| 2796 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides |
| 2797 | a prototype for the sbrk() function. Otherwise, it is |
| 2798 | up to the program to supply one. |
| 2799 | |
| 2800 | =item C<d_scalbnl> |
| 2801 | |
| 2802 | From F<d_scalbnl.U>: |
| 2803 | |
| 2804 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SCALBNL> symbol, which |
| 2805 | indicates to the C program that the scalbnl() routine is available. |
| 2806 | If ilogbl is also present we can emulate frexpl. |
| 2807 | |
| 2808 | =item C<d_sched_yield> |
| 2809 | |
| 2810 | From F<d_pthread_y.U>: |
| 2811 | |
| 2812 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SCHED_YIELD> |
| 2813 | symbol if the sched_yield routine is available to yield |
| 2814 | the execution of the current thread. |
| 2815 | |
| 2816 | =item C<d_scm_rights> |
| 2817 | |
| 2818 | From F<d_socket.U>: |
| 2819 | |
| 2820 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SCM_RIGHTS> symbol, |
| 2821 | which indicates that the C<SCM_RIGHTS> is available. #ifdef is |
| 2822 | not enough because it may be an enum, glibc has been known to do this. |
| 2823 | |
| 2824 | =item C<d_SCNfldbl> |
| 2825 | |
| 2826 | From F<longdblfio.U>: |
| 2827 | |
| 2828 | This variable conditionally defines the PERL_PRIfldbl symbol, which |
| 2829 | indiciates that stdio has a symbol to scan long doubles. |
| 2830 | |
| 2831 | =item C<d_seekdir> |
| 2832 | |
| 2833 | From F<d_readdir.U>: |
| 2834 | |
| 2835 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SEEKDIR> if seekdir() is |
| 2836 | available. |
| 2837 | |
| 2838 | =item C<d_select> |
| 2839 | |
| 2840 | From F<d_select.U>: |
| 2841 | |
| 2842 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SELECT> if select() is |
| 2843 | available to select active file descriptors. A <sys/time.h> |
| 2844 | inclusion may be necessary for the timeout field. |
| 2845 | |
| 2846 | =item C<d_sem> |
| 2847 | |
| 2848 | From F<d_sem.U>: |
| 2849 | |
| 2850 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SEM> symbol, which |
| 2851 | indicates that the entire sem*(2) library is present. |
| 2852 | |
| 2853 | =item C<d_semctl> |
| 2854 | |
| 2855 | From F<d_semctl.U>: |
| 2856 | |
| 2857 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SEMCTL> symbol, which |
| 2858 | indicates to the C program that the semctl() routine is available. |
| 2859 | |
| 2860 | =item C<d_semctl_semid_ds> |
| 2861 | |
| 2862 | From F<d_union_semun.U>: |
| 2863 | |
| 2864 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_SEMCTL_SEMID_DS>, which |
| 2865 | indicates that struct semid_ds * is to be used for semctl C<IPC_STAT>. |
| 2866 | |
| 2867 | =item C<d_semctl_semun> |
| 2868 | |
| 2869 | From F<d_union_semun.U>: |
| 2870 | |
| 2871 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_SEMCTL_SEMUN>, which |
| 2872 | indicates that union semun is to be used for semctl C<IPC_STAT>. |
| 2873 | |
| 2874 | =item C<d_semget> |
| 2875 | |
| 2876 | From F<d_semget.U>: |
| 2877 | |
| 2878 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SEMGET> symbol, which |
| 2879 | indicates to the C program that the semget() routine is available. |
| 2880 | |
| 2881 | =item C<d_semop> |
| 2882 | |
| 2883 | From F<d_semop.U>: |
| 2884 | |
| 2885 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SEMOP> symbol, which |
| 2886 | indicates to the C program that the semop() routine is available. |
| 2887 | |
| 2888 | =item C<d_sendmsg> |
| 2889 | |
| 2890 | From F<d_sendmsg.U>: |
| 2891 | |
| 2892 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SENDMSG> symbol, which |
| 2893 | indicates to the C program that the sendmsg() routine is available. |
| 2894 | |
| 2895 | =item C<d_setegid> |
| 2896 | |
| 2897 | From F<d_setegid.U>: |
| 2898 | |
| 2899 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETEGID> symbol, which |
| 2900 | indicates to the C program that the setegid() routine is available |
| 2901 | to change the effective gid of the current program. |
| 2902 | |
| 2903 | =item C<d_seteuid> |
| 2904 | |
| 2905 | From F<d_seteuid.U>: |
| 2906 | |
| 2907 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETEUID> symbol, which |
| 2908 | indicates to the C program that the seteuid() routine is available |
| 2909 | to change the effective uid of the current program. |
| 2910 | |
| 2911 | =item C<d_setgrent> |
| 2912 | |
| 2913 | From F<d_setgrent.U>: |
| 2914 | |
| 2915 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETGRENT> symbol, which |
| 2916 | indicates to the C program that the setgrent() routine is available |
| 2917 | for initializing sequential access to the group database. |
| 2918 | |
| 2919 | =item C<d_setgrent_r> |
| 2920 | |
| 2921 | From F<d_setgrent_r.U>: |
| 2922 | |
| 2923 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETGRENT_R> symbol, |
| 2924 | which indicates to the C program that the setgrent_r() |
| 2925 | routine is available. |
| 2926 | |
| 2927 | =item C<d_setgrps> |
| 2928 | |
| 2929 | From F<d_setgrps.U>: |
| 2930 | |
| 2931 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETGROUPS> symbol, which |
| 2932 | indicates to the C program that the setgroups() routine is available |
| 2933 | to set the list of process groups. |
| 2934 | |
| 2935 | =item C<d_sethent> |
| 2936 | |
| 2937 | From F<d_sethent.U>: |
| 2938 | |
| 2939 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETHOSTENT> if sethostent() is |
| 2940 | available. |
| 2941 | |
| 2942 | =item C<d_sethostent_r> |
| 2943 | |
| 2944 | From F<d_sethostent_r.U>: |
| 2945 | |
| 2946 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETHOSTENT_R> symbol, |
| 2947 | which indicates to the C program that the sethostent_r() |
| 2948 | routine is available. |
| 2949 | |
| 2950 | =item C<d_setitimer> |
| 2951 | |
| 2952 | From F<d_setitimer.U>: |
| 2953 | |
| 2954 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETITIMER> symbol, which |
| 2955 | indicates to the C program that the setitimer() routine is available. |
| 2956 | |
| 2957 | =item C<d_setlinebuf> |
| 2958 | |
| 2959 | From F<d_setlnbuf.U>: |
| 2960 | |
| 2961 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETLINEBUF> symbol, which |
| 2962 | indicates to the C program that the setlinebuf() routine is available |
| 2963 | to change stderr or stdout from block-buffered or unbuffered to a |
| 2964 | line-buffered mode. |
| 2965 | |
| 2966 | =item C<d_setlocale> |
| 2967 | |
| 2968 | From F<d_setlocale.U>: |
| 2969 | |
| 2970 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETLOCALE> if setlocale() is |
| 2971 | available to handle locale-specific ctype implementations. |
| 2972 | |
| 2973 | =item C<d_setlocale_r> |
| 2974 | |
| 2975 | From F<d_setlocale_r.U>: |
| 2976 | |
| 2977 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETLOCALE_R> symbol, |
| 2978 | which indicates to the C program that the setlocale_r() |
| 2979 | routine is available. |
| 2980 | |
| 2981 | =item C<d_setnent> |
| 2982 | |
| 2983 | From F<d_setnent.U>: |
| 2984 | |
| 2985 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETNETENT> if setnetent() is |
| 2986 | available. |
| 2987 | |
| 2988 | =item C<d_setnetent_r> |
| 2989 | |
| 2990 | From F<d_setnetent_r.U>: |
| 2991 | |
| 2992 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETNETENT_R> symbol, |
| 2993 | which indicates to the C program that the setnetent_r() |
| 2994 | routine is available. |
| 2995 | |
| 2996 | =item C<d_setpent> |
| 2997 | |
| 2998 | From F<d_setpent.U>: |
| 2999 | |
| 3000 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETPROTOENT> if setprotoent() is |
| 3001 | available. |
| 3002 | |
| 3003 | =item C<d_setpgid> |
| 3004 | |
| 3005 | From F<d_setpgid.U>: |
| 3006 | |
| 3007 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPGID> symbol if the |
| 3008 | setpgid(pid, gpid) function is available to set process group C<ID>. |
| 3009 | |
| 3010 | =item C<d_setpgrp2> |
| 3011 | |
| 3012 | From F<d_setpgrp2.U>: |
| 3013 | |
| 3014 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_SETPGRP2 symbol, which |
| 3015 | indicates to the C program that the setpgrp2() (as in F<DG/C<UX>>) routine |
| 3016 | is available to set the current process group. |
| 3017 | |
| 3018 | =item C<d_setpgrp> |
| 3019 | |
| 3020 | From F<d_setpgrp.U>: |
| 3021 | |
| 3022 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETPGRP> if setpgrp() is |
| 3023 | available to set the current process group. |
| 3024 | |
| 3025 | =item C<d_setprior> |
| 3026 | |
| 3027 | From F<d_setprior.U>: |
| 3028 | |
| 3029 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETPRIORITY> if setpriority() |
| 3030 | is available to set a process's priority. |
| 3031 | |
| 3032 | =item C<d_setproctitle> |
| 3033 | |
| 3034 | From F<d_setproctitle.U>: |
| 3035 | |
| 3036 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPROCTITLE> symbol, |
| 3037 | which indicates to the C program that the setproctitle() routine |
| 3038 | is available. |
| 3039 | |
| 3040 | =item C<d_setprotoent_r> |
| 3041 | |
| 3042 | From F<d_setprotoent_r.U>: |
| 3043 | |
| 3044 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPROTOENT_R> symbol, |
| 3045 | which indicates to the C program that the setprotoent_r() |
| 3046 | routine is available. |
| 3047 | |
| 3048 | =item C<d_setpwent> |
| 3049 | |
| 3050 | From F<d_setpwent.U>: |
| 3051 | |
| 3052 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPWENT> symbol, which |
| 3053 | indicates to the C program that the setpwent() routine is available |
| 3054 | for initializing sequential access to the passwd database. |
| 3055 | |
| 3056 | =item C<d_setpwent_r> |
| 3057 | |
| 3058 | From F<d_setpwent_r.U>: |
| 3059 | |
| 3060 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETPWENT_R> symbol, |
| 3061 | which indicates to the C program that the setpwent_r() |
| 3062 | routine is available. |
| 3063 | |
| 3064 | =item C<d_setregid> |
| 3065 | |
| 3066 | From F<d_setregid.U>: |
| 3067 | |
| 3068 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETREGID> if setregid() is |
| 3069 | available to change the real and effective gid of the current |
| 3070 | process. |
| 3071 | |
| 3072 | =item C<d_setresgid> |
| 3073 | |
| 3074 | From F<d_setregid.U>: |
| 3075 | |
| 3076 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETRESGID> if setresgid() is |
| 3077 | available to change the real, effective and saved gid of the current |
| 3078 | process. |
| 3079 | |
| 3080 | =item C<d_setresuid> |
| 3081 | |
| 3082 | From F<d_setreuid.U>: |
| 3083 | |
| 3084 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETREUID> if setresuid() is |
| 3085 | available to change the real, effective and saved uid of the current |
| 3086 | process. |
| 3087 | |
| 3088 | =item C<d_setreuid> |
| 3089 | |
| 3090 | From F<d_setreuid.U>: |
| 3091 | |
| 3092 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETREUID> if setreuid() is |
| 3093 | available to change the real and effective uid of the current |
| 3094 | process. |
| 3095 | |
| 3096 | =item C<d_setrgid> |
| 3097 | |
| 3098 | From F<d_setrgid.U>: |
| 3099 | |
| 3100 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETRGID> symbol, which |
| 3101 | indicates to the C program that the setrgid() routine is available |
| 3102 | to change the real gid of the current program. |
| 3103 | |
| 3104 | =item C<d_setruid> |
| 3105 | |
| 3106 | From F<d_setruid.U>: |
| 3107 | |
| 3108 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETRUID> symbol, which |
| 3109 | indicates to the C program that the setruid() routine is available |
| 3110 | to change the real uid of the current program. |
| 3111 | |
| 3112 | =item C<d_setsent> |
| 3113 | |
| 3114 | From F<d_setsent.U>: |
| 3115 | |
| 3116 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETSERVENT> if setservent() is |
| 3117 | available. |
| 3118 | |
| 3119 | =item C<d_setservent_r> |
| 3120 | |
| 3121 | From F<d_setservent_r.U>: |
| 3122 | |
| 3123 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETSERVENT_R> symbol, |
| 3124 | which indicates to the C program that the setservent_r() |
| 3125 | routine is available. |
| 3126 | |
| 3127 | =item C<d_setsid> |
| 3128 | |
| 3129 | From F<d_setsid.U>: |
| 3130 | |
| 3131 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SETSID> if setsid() is |
| 3132 | available to set the process group C<ID>. |
| 3133 | |
| 3134 | =item C<d_setvbuf> |
| 3135 | |
| 3136 | From F<d_setvbuf.U>: |
| 3137 | |
| 3138 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETVBUF> symbol, which |
| 3139 | indicates to the C program that the setvbuf() routine is available |
| 3140 | to change buffering on an open stdio stream. |
| 3141 | |
| 3142 | =item C<d_sfio> |
| 3143 | |
| 3144 | From F<d_sfio.U>: |
| 3145 | |
| 3146 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_SFIO> symbol, |
| 3147 | and indicates whether sfio is available (and should be used). |
| 3148 | |
| 3149 | =item C<d_shm> |
| 3150 | |
| 3151 | From F<d_shm.U>: |
| 3152 | |
| 3153 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHM> symbol, which |
| 3154 | indicates that the entire shm*(2) library is present. |
| 3155 | |
| 3156 | =item C<d_shmat> |
| 3157 | |
| 3158 | From F<d_shmat.U>: |
| 3159 | |
| 3160 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMAT> symbol, which |
| 3161 | indicates to the C program that the shmat() routine is available. |
| 3162 | |
| 3163 | =item C<d_shmatprototype> |
| 3164 | |
| 3165 | From F<d_shmat.U>: |
| 3166 | |
| 3167 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMAT_PROTOTYPE> |
| 3168 | symbol, which indicates that F<sys/shm.h> has a prototype for |
| 3169 | shmat. |
| 3170 | |
| 3171 | =item C<d_shmctl> |
| 3172 | |
| 3173 | From F<d_shmctl.U>: |
| 3174 | |
| 3175 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMCTL> symbol, which |
| 3176 | indicates to the C program that the shmctl() routine is available. |
| 3177 | |
| 3178 | =item C<d_shmdt> |
| 3179 | |
| 3180 | From F<d_shmdt.U>: |
| 3181 | |
| 3182 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMDT> symbol, which |
| 3183 | indicates to the C program that the shmdt() routine is available. |
| 3184 | |
| 3185 | =item C<d_shmget> |
| 3186 | |
| 3187 | From F<d_shmget.U>: |
| 3188 | |
| 3189 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SHMGET> symbol, which |
| 3190 | indicates to the C program that the shmget() routine is available. |
| 3191 | |
| 3192 | =item C<d_sigaction> |
| 3193 | |
| 3194 | From F<d_sigaction.U>: |
| 3195 | |
| 3196 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SIGACTION> symbol, which |
| 3197 | indicates that the Vr4 sigaction() routine is available. |
| 3198 | |
| 3199 | =item C<d_sigprocmask> |
| 3200 | |
| 3201 | From F<d_sigprocmask.U>: |
| 3202 | |
| 3203 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SIGPROCMASK> |
| 3204 | if sigprocmask() is available to examine or change the signal mask |
| 3205 | of the calling process. |
| 3206 | |
| 3207 | =item C<d_sigsetjmp> |
| 3208 | |
| 3209 | From F<d_sigsetjmp.U>: |
| 3210 | |
| 3211 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SIGSETJMP> symbol, |
| 3212 | which indicates that the sigsetjmp() routine is available to |
| 3213 | call setjmp() and optionally save the process's signal mask. |
| 3214 | |
| 3215 | =item C<d_sockatmark> |
| 3216 | |
| 3217 | From F<d_sockatmark.U>: |
| 3218 | |
| 3219 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SOCKATMARK> symbol, which |
| 3220 | indicates to the C program that the sockatmark() routine is available. |
| 3221 | |
| 3222 | =item C<d_sockatmarkproto> |
| 3223 | |
| 3224 | From F<d_sockatmarkproto.U>: |
| 3225 | |
| 3226 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SOCKATMARK_PROTO> symbol, |
| 3227 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides |
| 3228 | a prototype for the sockatmark() function. Otherwise, it is |
| 3229 | up to the program to supply one. |
| 3230 | |
| 3231 | =item C<d_socket> |
| 3232 | |
| 3233 | From F<d_socket.U>: |
| 3234 | |
| 3235 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SOCKET>, which indicates |
| 3236 | that the C<BSD> socket interface is supported. |
| 3237 | |
| 3238 | =item C<d_socklen_t> |
| 3239 | |
| 3240 | From F<d_socklen_t.U>: |
| 3241 | |
| 3242 | This symbol will be defined if the C compiler supports socklen_t. |
| 3243 | |
| 3244 | =item C<d_sockpair> |
| 3245 | |
| 3246 | From F<d_socket.U>: |
| 3247 | |
| 3248 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SOCKETPAIR> symbol, which |
| 3249 | indicates that the C<BSD> socketpair() is supported. |
| 3250 | |
| 3251 | =item C<d_socks5_init> |
| 3252 | |
| 3253 | From F<d_socks5_init.U>: |
| 3254 | |
| 3255 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_SOCKS5_INIT symbol, which |
| 3256 | indicates to the C program that the socks5_init() routine is available. |
| 3257 | |
| 3258 | =item C<d_sprintf_returns_strlen> |
| 3259 | |
| 3260 | From F<d_sprintf_returns_strlen.U>: |
| 3261 | |
| 3262 | This variable defines whether sprintf returns the length of the string |
| 3263 | (as per the C<ANSI> spec). Some C libraries retain compatibility with |
| 3264 | pre-C<ANSI> C and return a pointer to the passed in buffer; for these |
| 3265 | this variable will be undef. |
| 3266 | |
| 3267 | =item C<d_sqrtl> |
| 3268 | |
| 3269 | From F<d_sqrtl.U>: |
| 3270 | |
| 3271 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SQRTL> symbol, which |
| 3272 | indicates to the C program that the sqrtl() routine is available. |
| 3273 | |
| 3274 | =item C<d_srand48_r> |
| 3275 | |
| 3276 | From F<d_srand48_r.U>: |
| 3277 | |
| 3278 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_SRAND48_R symbol, |
| 3279 | which indicates to the C program that the srand48_r() |
| 3280 | routine is available. |
| 3281 | |
| 3282 | =item C<d_srandom_r> |
| 3283 | |
| 3284 | From F<d_srandom_r.U>: |
| 3285 | |
| 3286 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SRANDOM_R> symbol, |
| 3287 | which indicates to the C program that the srandom_r() |
| 3288 | routine is available. |
| 3289 | |
| 3290 | =item C<d_sresgproto> |
| 3291 | |
| 3292 | From F<d_sresgproto.U>: |
| 3293 | |
| 3294 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETRESGID_PROTO> symbol, |
| 3295 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides |
| 3296 | a prototype for the setresgid() function. Otherwise, it is |
| 3297 | up to the program to supply one. |
| 3298 | |
| 3299 | =item C<d_sresuproto> |
| 3300 | |
| 3301 | From F<d_sresuproto.U>: |
| 3302 | |
| 3303 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SETRESUID_PROTO> symbol, |
| 3304 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides |
| 3305 | a prototype for the setresuid() function. Otherwise, it is |
| 3306 | up to the program to supply one. |
| 3307 | |
| 3308 | =item C<d_statblks> |
| 3309 | |
| 3310 | From F<d_statblks.U>: |
| 3311 | |
| 3312 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_STAT_BLOCKS> |
| 3313 | if this system has a stat structure declaring |
| 3314 | st_blksize and st_blocks. |
| 3315 | |
| 3316 | =item C<d_statfs_f_flags> |
| 3317 | |
| 3318 | From F<d_statfs_f_flags.U>: |
| 3319 | |
| 3320 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_STATFS_F_FLAGS> |
| 3321 | symbol, which indicates to struct statfs from has f_flags member. |
| 3322 | This kind of struct statfs is coming from F<sys/mount.h> (C<BSD>), |
| 3323 | not from F<sys/statfs.h> (C<SYSV>). |
| 3324 | |
| 3325 | =item C<d_statfs_s> |
| 3326 | |
| 3327 | From F<d_statfs_s.U>: |
| 3328 | |
| 3329 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRUCT_STATFS> symbol, |
| 3330 | which indicates that the struct statfs is supported. |
| 3331 | |
| 3332 | =item C<d_statvfs> |
| 3333 | |
| 3334 | From F<d_statvfs.U>: |
| 3335 | |
| 3336 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STATVFS> symbol, which |
| 3337 | indicates to the C program that the statvfs() routine is available. |
| 3338 | |
| 3339 | =item C<d_stdio_cnt_lval> |
| 3340 | |
| 3341 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: |
| 3342 | |
| 3343 | This variable conditionally defines C<STDIO_CNT_LVALUE> if the |
| 3344 | C<FILE_cnt> macro can be used as an lvalue. |
| 3345 | |
| 3346 | =item C<d_stdio_ptr_lval> |
| 3347 | |
| 3348 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: |
| 3349 | |
| 3350 | This variable conditionally defines C<STDIO_PTR_LVALUE> if the |
| 3351 | C<FILE_ptr> macro can be used as an lvalue. |
| 3352 | |
| 3353 | =item C<d_stdio_ptr_lval_nochange_cnt> |
| 3354 | |
| 3355 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: |
| 3356 | |
| 3357 | This symbol is defined if using the C<FILE_ptr> macro as an lvalue |
| 3358 | to increase the pointer by n leaves File_cnt(fp) unchanged. |
| 3359 | |
| 3360 | =item C<d_stdio_ptr_lval_sets_cnt> |
| 3361 | |
| 3362 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: |
| 3363 | |
| 3364 | This symbol is defined if using the C<FILE_ptr> macro as an lvalue |
| 3365 | to increase the pointer by n has the side effect of decreasing the |
| 3366 | value of File_cnt(fp) by n. |
| 3367 | |
| 3368 | =item C<d_stdio_stream_array> |
| 3369 | |
| 3370 | From F<stdio_streams.U>: |
| 3371 | |
| 3372 | This variable tells whether there is an array holding |
| 3373 | the stdio streams. |
| 3374 | |
| 3375 | =item C<d_stdiobase> |
| 3376 | |
| 3377 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: |
| 3378 | |
| 3379 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_STDIO_BASE> if this system |
| 3380 | has a C<FILE> structure declaring a usable _base field (or equivalent) |
| 3381 | in F<stdio.h>. |
| 3382 | |
| 3383 | =item C<d_stdstdio> |
| 3384 | |
| 3385 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: |
| 3386 | |
| 3387 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_STDIO_PTR> if this system |
| 3388 | has a C<FILE> structure declaring usable _ptr and _cnt fields (or |
| 3389 | equivalent) in F<stdio.h>. |
| 3390 | |
| 3391 | =item C<d_strchr> |
| 3392 | |
| 3393 | From F<d_strchr.U>: |
| 3394 | |
| 3395 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_STRCHR> if strchr() and |
| 3396 | strrchr() are available for string searching. |
| 3397 | |
| 3398 | =item C<d_strcoll> |
| 3399 | |
| 3400 | From F<d_strcoll.U>: |
| 3401 | |
| 3402 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_STRCOLL> if strcoll() is |
| 3403 | available to compare strings using collating information. |
| 3404 | |
| 3405 | =item C<d_strctcpy> |
| 3406 | |
| 3407 | From F<d_strctcpy.U>: |
| 3408 | |
| 3409 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_STRUCT_COPY> symbol, which |
| 3410 | indicates to the C program that this C compiler knows how to copy |
| 3411 | structures. |
| 3412 | |
| 3413 | =item C<d_strerrm> |
| 3414 | |
| 3415 | From F<d_strerror.U>: |
| 3416 | |
| 3417 | This variable holds what Strerrr is defined as to translate an error |
| 3418 | code condition into an error message string. It could be C<strerror> |
| 3419 | or a more C<complex> macro emulating strrror with sys_errlist[], or the |
| 3420 | C<unknown> string when both strerror and sys_errlist are missing. |
| 3421 | |
| 3422 | =item C<d_strerror> |
| 3423 | |
| 3424 | From F<d_strerror.U>: |
| 3425 | |
| 3426 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_STRERROR> if strerror() is |
| 3427 | available to translate error numbers to strings. |
| 3428 | |
| 3429 | =item C<d_strerror_r> |
| 3430 | |
| 3431 | From F<d_strerror_r.U>: |
| 3432 | |
| 3433 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRERROR_R> symbol, |
| 3434 | which indicates to the C program that the strerror_r() |
| 3435 | routine is available. |
| 3436 | |
| 3437 | =item C<d_strftime> |
| 3438 | |
| 3439 | From F<d_strftime.U>: |
| 3440 | |
| 3441 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRFTIME> symbol, which |
| 3442 | indicates to the C program that the strftime() routine is available. |
| 3443 | |
| 3444 | =item C<d_strlcat> |
| 3445 | |
| 3446 | From F<d_strlcat.U>: |
| 3447 | |
| 3448 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRLCAT> symbol, which |
| 3449 | indicates to the C program that the strlcat () routine is available. |
| 3450 | |
| 3451 | =item C<d_strlcpy> |
| 3452 | |
| 3453 | From F<d_strlcpy.U>: |
| 3454 | |
| 3455 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRLCPY> symbol, which |
| 3456 | indicates to the C program that the strlcpy () routine is available. |
| 3457 | |
| 3458 | =item C<d_strtod> |
| 3459 | |
| 3460 | From F<d_strtod.U>: |
| 3461 | |
| 3462 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOD> symbol, which |
| 3463 | indicates to the C program that the strtod() routine is available |
| 3464 | to provide better numeric string conversion than atof(). |
| 3465 | |
| 3466 | =item C<d_strtol> |
| 3467 | |
| 3468 | From F<d_strtol.U>: |
| 3469 | |
| 3470 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOL> symbol, which |
| 3471 | indicates to the C program that the strtol() routine is available |
| 3472 | to provide better numeric string conversion than atoi() and friends. |
| 3473 | |
| 3474 | =item C<d_strtold> |
| 3475 | |
| 3476 | From F<d_strtold.U>: |
| 3477 | |
| 3478 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOLD> symbol, which |
| 3479 | indicates to the C program that the strtold() routine is available. |
| 3480 | |
| 3481 | =item C<d_strtoll> |
| 3482 | |
| 3483 | From F<d_strtoll.U>: |
| 3484 | |
| 3485 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOLL> symbol, which |
| 3486 | indicates to the C program that the strtoll() routine is available. |
| 3487 | |
| 3488 | =item C<d_strtoq> |
| 3489 | |
| 3490 | From F<d_strtoq.U>: |
| 3491 | |
| 3492 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOQ> symbol, which |
| 3493 | indicates to the C program that the strtoq() routine is available. |
| 3494 | |
| 3495 | =item C<d_strtoul> |
| 3496 | |
| 3497 | From F<d_strtoul.U>: |
| 3498 | |
| 3499 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOUL> symbol, which |
| 3500 | indicates to the C program that the strtoul() routine is available |
| 3501 | to provide conversion of strings to unsigned long. |
| 3502 | |
| 3503 | =item C<d_strtoull> |
| 3504 | |
| 3505 | From F<d_strtoull.U>: |
| 3506 | |
| 3507 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOULL> symbol, which |
| 3508 | indicates to the C program that the strtoull() routine is available. |
| 3509 | |
| 3510 | =item C<d_strtouq> |
| 3511 | |
| 3512 | From F<d_strtouq.U>: |
| 3513 | |
| 3514 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_STRTOUQ> symbol, which |
| 3515 | indicates to the C program that the strtouq() routine is available. |
| 3516 | |
| 3517 | =item C<d_strxfrm> |
| 3518 | |
| 3519 | From F<d_strxfrm.U>: |
| 3520 | |
| 3521 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_STRXFRM> if strxfrm() is |
| 3522 | available to transform strings. |
| 3523 | |
| 3524 | =item C<d_suidsafe> |
| 3525 | |
| 3526 | From F<d_dosuid.U>: |
| 3527 | |
| 3528 | This variable conditionally defines C<SETUID_SCRIPTS_ARE_SECURE_NOW> |
| 3529 | if setuid scripts can be secure. This test looks in F</dev/fd/>. |
| 3530 | |
| 3531 | =item C<d_symlink> |
| 3532 | |
| 3533 | From F<d_symlink.U>: |
| 3534 | |
| 3535 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SYMLINK> symbol, which |
| 3536 | indicates to the C program that the symlink() routine is available |
| 3537 | to create symbolic links. |
| 3538 | |
| 3539 | =item C<d_syscall> |
| 3540 | |
| 3541 | From F<d_syscall.U>: |
| 3542 | |
| 3543 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SYSCALL> if syscall() is |
| 3544 | available call arbitrary system calls. |
| 3545 | |
| 3546 | =item C<d_syscallproto> |
| 3547 | |
| 3548 | From F<d_syscallproto.U>: |
| 3549 | |
| 3550 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SYSCALL_PROTO> symbol, |
| 3551 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides |
| 3552 | a prototype for the syscall() function. Otherwise, it is |
| 3553 | up to the program to supply one. |
| 3554 | |
| 3555 | =item C<d_sysconf> |
| 3556 | |
| 3557 | From F<d_sysconf.U>: |
| 3558 | |
| 3559 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_SYSCONF> symbol, which |
| 3560 | indicates to the C program that the sysconf() routine is available |
| 3561 | to determine system related limits and options. |
| 3562 | |
| 3563 | =item C<d_sysernlst> |
| 3564 | |
| 3565 | From F<d_strerror.U>: |
| 3566 | |
| 3567 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SYS_ERRNOLIST> if sys_errnolist[] |
| 3568 | is available to translate error numbers to the symbolic name. |
| 3569 | |
| 3570 | =item C<d_syserrlst> |
| 3571 | |
| 3572 | From F<d_strerror.U>: |
| 3573 | |
| 3574 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SYS_ERRLIST> if sys_errlist[] is |
| 3575 | available to translate error numbers to strings. |
| 3576 | |
| 3577 | =item C<d_system> |
| 3578 | |
| 3579 | From F<d_system.U>: |
| 3580 | |
| 3581 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_SYSTEM> if system() is |
| 3582 | available to issue a shell command. |
| 3583 | |
| 3584 | =item C<d_tcgetpgrp> |
| 3585 | |
| 3586 | From F<d_tcgtpgrp.U>: |
| 3587 | |
| 3588 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TCGETPGRP> symbol, which |
| 3589 | indicates to the C program that the tcgetpgrp() routine is available. |
| 3590 | to get foreground process group C<ID>. |
| 3591 | |
| 3592 | =item C<d_tcsetpgrp> |
| 3593 | |
| 3594 | From F<d_tcstpgrp.U>: |
| 3595 | |
| 3596 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TCSETPGRP> symbol, which |
| 3597 | indicates to the C program that the tcsetpgrp() routine is available |
| 3598 | to set foreground process group C<ID>. |
| 3599 | |
| 3600 | =item C<d_telldir> |
| 3601 | |
| 3602 | From F<d_readdir.U>: |
| 3603 | |
| 3604 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TELLDIR> if telldir() is |
| 3605 | available. |
| 3606 | |
| 3607 | =item C<d_telldirproto> |
| 3608 | |
| 3609 | From F<d_telldirproto.U>: |
| 3610 | |
| 3611 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TELLDIR_PROTO> symbol, |
| 3612 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides |
| 3613 | a prototype for the telldir() function. Otherwise, it is |
| 3614 | up to the program to supply one. |
| 3615 | |
| 3616 | =item C<d_time> |
| 3617 | |
| 3618 | From F<d_time.U>: |
| 3619 | |
| 3620 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TIME> symbol, which indicates |
| 3621 | that the time() routine exists. The time() routine is normaly |
| 3622 | provided on C<UNIX> systems. |
| 3623 | |
| 3624 | =item C<d_times> |
| 3625 | |
| 3626 | From F<d_times.U>: |
| 3627 | |
| 3628 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TIMES> symbol, which indicates |
| 3629 | that the times() routine exists. The times() routine is normaly |
| 3630 | provided on C<UNIX> systems. You may have to include <sys/times.h>. |
| 3631 | |
| 3632 | =item C<d_tm_tm_gmtoff> |
| 3633 | |
| 3634 | From F<i_time.U>: |
| 3635 | |
| 3636 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TM_TM_GMTOFF>, which indicates |
| 3637 | indicates to the C program that the struct tm has the tm_gmtoff field. |
| 3638 | |
| 3639 | =item C<d_tm_tm_zone> |
| 3640 | |
| 3641 | From F<i_time.U>: |
| 3642 | |
| 3643 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TM_TM_ZONE>, which indicates |
| 3644 | indicates to the C program that the struct tm has the tm_zone field. |
| 3645 | |
| 3646 | =item C<d_tmpnam_r> |
| 3647 | |
| 3648 | From F<d_tmpnam_r.U>: |
| 3649 | |
| 3650 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TMPNAM_R> symbol, |
| 3651 | which indicates to the C program that the tmpnam_r() |
| 3652 | routine is available. |
| 3653 | |
| 3654 | =item C<d_truncate> |
| 3655 | |
| 3656 | From F<d_truncate.U>: |
| 3657 | |
| 3658 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TRUNCATE> if truncate() is |
| 3659 | available to truncate files. |
| 3660 | |
| 3661 | =item C<d_ttyname_r> |
| 3662 | |
| 3663 | From F<d_ttyname_r.U>: |
| 3664 | |
| 3665 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_TTYNAME_R> symbol, |
| 3666 | which indicates to the C program that the ttyname_r() |
| 3667 | routine is available. |
| 3668 | |
| 3669 | =item C<d_tzname> |
| 3670 | |
| 3671 | From F<d_tzname.U>: |
| 3672 | |
| 3673 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_TZNAME> if tzname[] is |
| 3674 | available to access timezone names. |
| 3675 | |
| 3676 | =item C<d_u32align> |
| 3677 | |
| 3678 | From F<d_u32align.U>: |
| 3679 | |
| 3680 | This variable tells whether you must access character data |
| 3681 | through U32-aligned pointers. |
| 3682 | |
| 3683 | =item C<d_ualarm> |
| 3684 | |
| 3685 | From F<d_ualarm.U>: |
| 3686 | |
| 3687 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UALARM> symbol, which |
| 3688 | indicates to the C program that the ualarm() routine is available. |
| 3689 | |
| 3690 | =item C<d_umask> |
| 3691 | |
| 3692 | From F<d_umask.U>: |
| 3693 | |
| 3694 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UMASK> symbol, which |
| 3695 | indicates to the C program that the umask() routine is available. |
| 3696 | to set and get the value of the file creation mask. |
| 3697 | |
| 3698 | =item C<d_uname> |
| 3699 | |
| 3700 | From F<d_gethname.U>: |
| 3701 | |
| 3702 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UNAME> symbol, which |
| 3703 | indicates to the C program that the uname() routine may be |
| 3704 | used to derive the host name. |
| 3705 | |
| 3706 | =item C<d_union_semun> |
| 3707 | |
| 3708 | From F<d_union_semun.U>: |
| 3709 | |
| 3710 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_UNION_SEMUN> if the |
| 3711 | union semun is defined by including <sys/sem.h>. |
| 3712 | |
| 3713 | =item C<d_unordered> |
| 3714 | |
| 3715 | From F<d_unordered.U>: |
| 3716 | |
| 3717 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UNORDERED> symbol, which |
| 3718 | indicates to the C program that the unordered() routine is available. |
| 3719 | |
| 3720 | =item C<d_unsetenv> |
| 3721 | |
| 3722 | From F<d_unsetenv.U>: |
| 3723 | |
| 3724 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_UNSETENV> symbol, which |
| 3725 | indicates to the C program that the unsetenv () routine is available. |
| 3726 | |
| 3727 | =item C<d_usleep> |
| 3728 | |
| 3729 | From F<d_usleep.U>: |
| 3730 | |
| 3731 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_USLEEP> if usleep() is |
| 3732 | available to do high granularity sleeps. |
| 3733 | |
| 3734 | =item C<d_usleepproto> |
| 3735 | |
| 3736 | From F<d_usleepproto.U>: |
| 3737 | |
| 3738 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_USLEEP_PROTO> symbol, |
| 3739 | which indicates to the C program that the system provides |
| 3740 | a prototype for the usleep() function. Otherwise, it is |
| 3741 | up to the program to supply one. |
| 3742 | |
| 3743 | =item C<d_ustat> |
| 3744 | |
| 3745 | From F<d_ustat.U>: |
| 3746 | |
| 3747 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_USTAT> if ustat() is |
| 3748 | available to query file system statistics by dev_t. |
| 3749 | |
| 3750 | =item C<d_vendorarch> |
| 3751 | |
| 3752 | From F<vendorarch.U>: |
| 3753 | |
| 3754 | This variable conditionally defined C<PERL_VENDORARCH>. |
| 3755 | |
| 3756 | =item C<d_vendorbin> |
| 3757 | |
| 3758 | From F<vendorbin.U>: |
| 3759 | |
| 3760 | This variable conditionally defines C<PERL_VENDORBIN>. |
| 3761 | |
| 3762 | =item C<d_vendorlib> |
| 3763 | |
| 3764 | From F<vendorlib.U>: |
| 3765 | |
| 3766 | This variable conditionally defines C<PERL_VENDORLIB>. |
| 3767 | |
| 3768 | =item C<d_vendorscript> |
| 3769 | |
| 3770 | From F<vendorscript.U>: |
| 3771 | |
| 3772 | This variable conditionally defines C<PERL_VENDORSCRIPT>. |
| 3773 | |
| 3774 | =item C<d_vfork> |
| 3775 | |
| 3776 | From F<d_vfork.U>: |
| 3777 | |
| 3778 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_VFORK> symbol, which |
| 3779 | indicates the vfork() routine is available. |
| 3780 | |
| 3781 | =item C<d_void_closedir> |
| 3782 | |
| 3783 | From F<d_closedir.U>: |
| 3784 | |
| 3785 | This variable conditionally defines C<VOID_CLOSEDIR> if closedir() |
| 3786 | does not return a value. |
| 3787 | |
| 3788 | =item C<d_voidsig> |
| 3789 | |
| 3790 | From F<d_voidsig.U>: |
| 3791 | |
| 3792 | This variable conditionally defines C<VOIDSIG> if this system |
| 3793 | declares "void (*signal(...))()" in F<signal.h>. The old way was to |
| 3794 | declare it as "int (*signal(...))()". |
| 3795 | |
| 3796 | =item C<d_voidtty> |
| 3797 | |
| 3798 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>: |
| 3799 | |
| 3800 | This variable conditionally defines C<USE_IOCNOTTY> to indicate that the |
| 3801 | ioctl() call with C<TIOCNOTTY> should be used to void tty association. |
| 3802 | Otherwise (on C<USG> probably), it is enough to close the standard file |
| 3803 | decriptors and do a setpgrp(). |
| 3804 | |
| 3805 | =item C<d_volatile> |
| 3806 | |
| 3807 | From F<d_volatile.U>: |
| 3808 | |
| 3809 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HASVOLATILE> symbol, which |
| 3810 | indicates to the C program that this C compiler knows about the |
| 3811 | volatile declaration. |
| 3812 | |
| 3813 | =item C<d_vprintf> |
| 3814 | |
| 3815 | From F<d_vprintf.U>: |
| 3816 | |
| 3817 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_VPRINTF> symbol, which |
| 3818 | indicates to the C program that the vprintf() routine is available |
| 3819 | to printf with a pointer to an argument list. |
| 3820 | |
| 3821 | =item C<d_wait4> |
| 3822 | |
| 3823 | From F<d_wait4.U>: |
| 3824 | |
| 3825 | This variable conditionally defines the HAS_WAIT4 symbol, which |
| 3826 | indicates the wait4() routine is available. |
| 3827 | |
| 3828 | =item C<d_waitpid> |
| 3829 | |
| 3830 | From F<d_waitpid.U>: |
| 3831 | |
| 3832 | This variable conditionally defines C<HAS_WAITPID> if waitpid() is |
| 3833 | available to wait for child process. |
| 3834 | |
| 3835 | =item C<d_wcstombs> |
| 3836 | |
| 3837 | From F<d_wcstombs.U>: |
| 3838 | |
| 3839 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_WCSTOMBS> symbol, which |
| 3840 | indicates to the C program that the wcstombs() routine is available |
| 3841 | to convert wide character strings to multibyte strings. |
| 3842 | |
| 3843 | =item C<d_wctomb> |
| 3844 | |
| 3845 | From F<d_wctomb.U>: |
| 3846 | |
| 3847 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_WCTOMB> symbol, which |
| 3848 | indicates to the C program that the wctomb() routine is available |
| 3849 | to convert a wide character to a multibyte. |
| 3850 | |
| 3851 | =item C<d_writev> |
| 3852 | |
| 3853 | From F<d_writev.U>: |
| 3854 | |
| 3855 | This variable conditionally defines the C<HAS_WRITEV> symbol, which |
| 3856 | indicates to the C program that the writev() routine is available. |
| 3857 | |
| 3858 | =item C<d_xenix> |
| 3859 | |
| 3860 | From F<Guess.U>: |
| 3861 | |
| 3862 | This variable conditionally defines the symbol C<XENIX>, which alerts |
| 3863 | the C program that it runs under Xenix. |
| 3864 | |
| 3865 | =item C<date> |
| 3866 | |
| 3867 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 3868 | |
| 3869 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 3870 | full pathname (if any) of the date program. After Configure runs, |
| 3871 | the value is reset to a plain C<date> and is not useful. |
| 3872 | |
| 3873 | =item C<db_hashtype> |
| 3874 | |
| 3875 | From F<i_db.U>: |
| 3876 | |
| 3877 | This variable contains the type of the hash structure element |
| 3878 | in the <db.h> header file. In older versions of C<DB>, it was |
| 3879 | int, while in newer ones it is u_int32_t. |
| 3880 | |
| 3881 | =item C<db_prefixtype> |
| 3882 | |
| 3883 | From F<i_db.U>: |
| 3884 | |
| 3885 | This variable contains the type of the prefix structure element |
| 3886 | in the <db.h> header file. In older versions of C<DB>, it was |
| 3887 | int, while in newer ones it is size_t. |
| 3888 | |
| 3889 | =item C<db_version_major> |
| 3890 | |
| 3891 | From F<i_db.U>: |
| 3892 | |
| 3893 | This variable contains the major version number of |
| 3894 | Berkeley C<DB> found in the <db.h> header file. |
| 3895 | |
| 3896 | =item C<db_version_minor> |
| 3897 | |
| 3898 | From F<i_db.U>: |
| 3899 | |
| 3900 | This variable contains the minor version number of |
| 3901 | Berkeley C<DB> found in the <db.h> header file. |
| 3902 | For C<DB> version 1 this is always 0. |
| 3903 | |
| 3904 | =item C<db_version_patch> |
| 3905 | |
| 3906 | From F<i_db.U>: |
| 3907 | |
| 3908 | This variable contains the patch version number of |
| 3909 | Berkeley C<DB> found in the <db.h> header file. |
| 3910 | For C<DB> version 1 this is always 0. |
| 3911 | |
| 3912 | =item C<defvoidused> |
| 3913 | |
| 3914 | From F<voidflags.U>: |
| 3915 | |
| 3916 | This variable contains the default value of the C<VOIDUSED> symbol (15). |
| 3917 | |
| 3918 | =item C<direntrytype> |
| 3919 | |
| 3920 | From F<i_dirent.U>: |
| 3921 | |
| 3922 | This symbol is set to C<struct direct> or C<struct dirent> depending on |
| 3923 | whether dirent is available or not. You should use this pseudo type to |
| 3924 | portably declare your directory entries. |
| 3925 | |
| 3926 | =item C<dlext> |
| 3927 | |
| 3928 | From F<dlext.U>: |
| 3929 | |
| 3930 | This variable contains the extension that is to be used for the |
| 3931 | dynamically loaded modules that perl generaties. |
| 3932 | |
| 3933 | =item C<dlsrc> |
| 3934 | |
| 3935 | From F<dlsrc.U>: |
| 3936 | |
| 3937 | This variable contains the name of the dynamic loading file that |
| 3938 | will be used with the package. |
| 3939 | |
| 3940 | =item C<doublesize> |
| 3941 | |
| 3942 | From F<doublesize.U>: |
| 3943 | |
| 3944 | This variable contains the value of the C<DOUBLESIZE> symbol, which |
| 3945 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a double. |
| 3946 | |
| 3947 | =item C<drand01> |
| 3948 | |
| 3949 | From F<randfunc.U>: |
| 3950 | |
| 3951 | Indicates the macro to be used to generate normalized |
| 3952 | random numbers. Uses randfunc, often divided by |
| 3953 | (double) (((unsigned long) 1 << randbits)) in order to |
| 3954 | normalize the result. |
| 3955 | In C programs, the macro C<Drand01> is mapped to drand01. |
| 3956 | |
| 3957 | =item C<drand48_r_proto> |
| 3958 | |
| 3959 | From F<d_drand48_r.U>: |
| 3960 | |
| 3961 | This variable encodes the prototype of drand48_r. |
| 3962 | It is zero if d_drand48_r is undef, and one of the |
| 3963 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_drand48_r |
| 3964 | is defined. |
| 3965 | |
| 3966 | =item C<dynamic_ext> |
| 3967 | |
| 3968 | From F<Extensions.U>: |
| 3969 | |
| 3970 | This variable holds a list of C<XS> extension files we want to |
| 3971 | link dynamically into the package. It is used by Makefile. |
| 3972 | |
| 3973 | =back |
| 3974 | |
| 3975 | =head2 e |
| 3976 | |
| 3977 | =over 4 |
| 3978 | |
| 3979 | =item C<eagain> |
| 3980 | |
| 3981 | From F<nblock_io.U>: |
| 3982 | |
| 3983 | This variable bears the symbolic errno code set by read() when no |
| 3984 | data is present on the file and non-blocking I/O was enabled (otherwise, |
| 3985 | read() blocks naturally). |
| 3986 | |
| 3987 | =item C<ebcdic> |
| 3988 | |
| 3989 | From F<ebcdic.U>: |
| 3990 | |
| 3991 | This variable conditionally defines C<EBCDIC> if this |
| 3992 | system uses C<EBCDIC> encoding. Among other things, this |
| 3993 | means that the character ranges are not contiguous. |
| 3994 | See F<trnl.U> |
| 3995 | |
| 3996 | =item C<echo> |
| 3997 | |
| 3998 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 3999 | |
| 4000 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 4001 | full pathname (if any) of the echo program. After Configure runs, |
| 4002 | the value is reset to a plain C<echo> and is not useful. |
| 4003 | |
| 4004 | =item C<egrep> |
| 4005 | |
| 4006 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 4007 | |
| 4008 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 4009 | full pathname (if any) of the egrep program. After Configure runs, |
| 4010 | the value is reset to a plain C<egrep> and is not useful. |
| 4011 | |
| 4012 | =item C<emacs> |
| 4013 | |
| 4014 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 4015 | |
| 4016 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 4017 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 4018 | |
| 4019 | =item C<endgrent_r_proto> |
| 4020 | |
| 4021 | From F<d_endgrent_r.U>: |
| 4022 | |
| 4023 | This variable encodes the prototype of endgrent_r. |
| 4024 | It is zero if d_endgrent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4025 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endgrent_r |
| 4026 | is defined. |
| 4027 | |
| 4028 | =item C<endhostent_r_proto> |
| 4029 | |
| 4030 | From F<d_endhostent_r.U>: |
| 4031 | |
| 4032 | This variable encodes the prototype of endhostent_r. |
| 4033 | It is zero if d_endhostent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4034 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endhostent_r |
| 4035 | is defined. |
| 4036 | |
| 4037 | =item C<endnetent_r_proto> |
| 4038 | |
| 4039 | From F<d_endnetent_r.U>: |
| 4040 | |
| 4041 | This variable encodes the prototype of endnetent_r. |
| 4042 | It is zero if d_endnetent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4043 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endnetent_r |
| 4044 | is defined. |
| 4045 | |
| 4046 | =item C<endprotoent_r_proto> |
| 4047 | |
| 4048 | From F<d_endprotoent_r.U>: |
| 4049 | |
| 4050 | This variable encodes the prototype of endprotoent_r. |
| 4051 | It is zero if d_endprotoent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4052 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endprotoent_r |
| 4053 | is defined. |
| 4054 | |
| 4055 | =item C<endpwent_r_proto> |
| 4056 | |
| 4057 | From F<d_endpwent_r.U>: |
| 4058 | |
| 4059 | This variable encodes the prototype of endpwent_r. |
| 4060 | It is zero if d_endpwent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4061 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endpwent_r |
| 4062 | is defined. |
| 4063 | |
| 4064 | =item C<endservent_r_proto> |
| 4065 | |
| 4066 | From F<d_endservent_r.U>: |
| 4067 | |
| 4068 | This variable encodes the prototype of endservent_r. |
| 4069 | It is zero if d_endservent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4070 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_endservent_r |
| 4071 | is defined. |
| 4072 | |
| 4073 | =item C<eunicefix> |
| 4074 | |
| 4075 | From F<Init.U>: |
| 4076 | |
| 4077 | When running under Eunice this variable contains a command which will |
| 4078 | convert a shell script to the proper form of text file for it to be |
| 4079 | executable by the shell. On other systems it is a no-op. |
| 4080 | |
| 4081 | =item C<exe_ext> |
| 4082 | |
| 4083 | From F<Unix.U>: |
| 4084 | |
| 4085 | This is an old synonym for _exe. |
| 4086 | |
| 4087 | =item C<expr> |
| 4088 | |
| 4089 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 4090 | |
| 4091 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 4092 | full pathname (if any) of the expr program. After Configure runs, |
| 4093 | the value is reset to a plain C<expr> and is not useful. |
| 4094 | |
| 4095 | =item C<extensions> |
| 4096 | |
| 4097 | From F<Extensions.U>: |
| 4098 | |
| 4099 | This variable holds a list of all extension files (both C<XS> and |
| 4100 | non-xs linked into the package. It is propagated to F<Config.pm> |
| 4101 | and is typically used to test whether a particular extesion |
| 4102 | is available. |
| 4103 | |
| 4104 | =item C<extras> |
| 4105 | |
| 4106 | From F<Extras.U>: |
| 4107 | |
| 4108 | This variable holds a list of extra modules to install. |
| 4109 | |
| 4110 | =back |
| 4111 | |
| 4112 | =head2 f |
| 4113 | |
| 4114 | =over 4 |
| 4115 | |
| 4116 | =item C<fflushall> |
| 4117 | |
| 4118 | From F<fflushall.U>: |
| 4119 | |
| 4120 | This symbol, if defined, tells that to flush |
| 4121 | all pending stdio output one must loop through all |
| 4122 | the stdio file handles stored in an array and fflush them. |
| 4123 | Note that if fflushNULL is defined, fflushall will not |
| 4124 | even be probed for and will be left undefined. |
| 4125 | |
| 4126 | =item C<fflushNULL> |
| 4127 | |
| 4128 | From F<fflushall.U>: |
| 4129 | |
| 4130 | This symbol, if defined, tells that fflush(C<NULL>) does flush |
| 4131 | all pending stdio output. |
| 4132 | |
| 4133 | =item C<find> |
| 4134 | |
| 4135 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 4136 | |
| 4137 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 4138 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 4139 | |
| 4140 | =item C<firstmakefile> |
| 4141 | |
| 4142 | From F<Unix.U>: |
| 4143 | |
| 4144 | This variable defines the first file searched by make. On unix, |
| 4145 | it is makefile (then Makefile). On case-insensitive systems, |
| 4146 | it might be something else. This is only used to deal with |
| 4147 | convoluted make depend tricks. |
| 4148 | |
| 4149 | =item C<flex> |
| 4150 | |
| 4151 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 4152 | |
| 4153 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 4154 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 4155 | |
| 4156 | =item C<fpossize> |
| 4157 | |
| 4158 | From F<fpossize.U>: |
| 4159 | |
| 4160 | This variable contains the size of a fpostype in bytes. |
| 4161 | |
| 4162 | =item C<fpostype> |
| 4163 | |
| 4164 | From F<fpostype.U>: |
| 4165 | |
| 4166 | This variable defines Fpos_t to be something like fpos_t, long, |
| 4167 | uint, or whatever type is used to declare file positions in libc. |
| 4168 | |
| 4169 | =item C<freetype> |
| 4170 | |
| 4171 | From F<mallocsrc.U>: |
| 4172 | |
| 4173 | This variable contains the return type of free(). It is usually |
| 4174 | void, but occasionally int. |
| 4175 | |
| 4176 | =item C<from> |
| 4177 | |
| 4178 | From F<Cross.U>: |
| 4179 | |
| 4180 | This variable contains the command used by Configure |
| 4181 | to copy files from the target host. Useful and available |
| 4182 | only during Perl build. |
| 4183 | The string C<:> if not cross-compiling. |
| 4184 | |
| 4185 | =item C<full_ar> |
| 4186 | |
| 4187 | From F<Loc_ar.U>: |
| 4188 | |
| 4189 | This variable contains the full pathname to C<ar>, whether or |
| 4190 | not the user has specified C<portability>. This is only used |
| 4191 | in the F<Makefile.SH>. |
| 4192 | |
| 4193 | =item C<full_csh> |
| 4194 | |
| 4195 | From F<d_csh.U>: |
| 4196 | |
| 4197 | This variable contains the full pathname to C<csh>, whether or |
| 4198 | not the user has specified C<portability>. This is only used |
| 4199 | in the compiled C program, and we assume that all systems which |
| 4200 | can share this executable will have the same full pathname to |
| 4201 | F<csh.> |
| 4202 | |
| 4203 | =item C<full_sed> |
| 4204 | |
| 4205 | From F<Loc_sed.U>: |
| 4206 | |
| 4207 | This variable contains the full pathname to C<sed>, whether or |
| 4208 | not the user has specified C<portability>. This is only used |
| 4209 | in the compiled C program, and we assume that all systems which |
| 4210 | can share this executable will have the same full pathname to |
| 4211 | F<sed.> |
| 4212 | |
| 4213 | =back |
| 4214 | |
| 4215 | =head2 g |
| 4216 | |
| 4217 | =over 4 |
| 4218 | |
| 4219 | =item C<gccansipedantic> |
| 4220 | |
| 4221 | From F<gccvers.U>: |
| 4222 | |
| 4223 | If C<GNU> cc (gcc) is used, this variable will enable (if set) the |
| 4224 | -ansi and -pedantic ccflags for building core files (through |
| 4225 | cflags script). (See F<Porting/pumpkin.pod> for full description). |
| 4226 | |
| 4227 | =item C<gccosandvers> |
| 4228 | |
| 4229 | From F<gccvers.U>: |
| 4230 | |
| 4231 | If C<GNU> cc (gcc) is used, this variable holds the operating system |
| 4232 | and version used to compile gcc. It is set to '' if not gcc, |
| 4233 | or if nothing useful can be parsed as the os version. |
| 4234 | |
| 4235 | =item C<gccversion> |
| 4236 | |
| 4237 | From F<gccvers.U>: |
| 4238 | |
| 4239 | If C<GNU> cc (gcc) is used, this variable holds C<1> or C<2> to |
| 4240 | indicate whether the compiler is version 1 or 2. This is used in |
| 4241 | setting some of the default cflags. It is set to '' if not gcc. |
| 4242 | |
| 4243 | =item C<getgrent_r_proto> |
| 4244 | |
| 4245 | From F<d_getgrent_r.U>: |
| 4246 | |
| 4247 | This variable encodes the prototype of getgrent_r. |
| 4248 | It is zero if d_getgrent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4249 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getgrent_r |
| 4250 | is defined. |
| 4251 | |
| 4252 | =item C<getgrgid_r_proto> |
| 4253 | |
| 4254 | From F<d_getgrgid_r.U>: |
| 4255 | |
| 4256 | This variable encodes the prototype of getgrgid_r. |
| 4257 | It is zero if d_getgrgid_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4258 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getgrgid_r |
| 4259 | is defined. |
| 4260 | |
| 4261 | =item C<getgrnam_r_proto> |
| 4262 | |
| 4263 | From F<d_getgrnam_r.U>: |
| 4264 | |
| 4265 | This variable encodes the prototype of getgrnam_r. |
| 4266 | It is zero if d_getgrnam_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4267 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getgrnam_r |
| 4268 | is defined. |
| 4269 | |
| 4270 | =item C<gethostbyaddr_r_proto> |
| 4271 | |
| 4272 | From F<d_gethostbyaddr_r.U>: |
| 4273 | |
| 4274 | This variable encodes the prototype of gethostbyaddr_r. |
| 4275 | It is zero if d_gethostbyaddr_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4276 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_gethostbyaddr_r |
| 4277 | is defined. |
| 4278 | |
| 4279 | =item C<gethostbyname_r_proto> |
| 4280 | |
| 4281 | From F<d_gethostbyname_r.U>: |
| 4282 | |
| 4283 | This variable encodes the prototype of gethostbyname_r. |
| 4284 | It is zero if d_gethostbyname_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4285 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_gethostbyname_r |
| 4286 | is defined. |
| 4287 | |
| 4288 | =item C<gethostent_r_proto> |
| 4289 | |
| 4290 | From F<d_gethostent_r.U>: |
| 4291 | |
| 4292 | This variable encodes the prototype of gethostent_r. |
| 4293 | It is zero if d_gethostent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4294 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_gethostent_r |
| 4295 | is defined. |
| 4296 | |
| 4297 | =item C<getlogin_r_proto> |
| 4298 | |
| 4299 | From F<d_getlogin_r.U>: |
| 4300 | |
| 4301 | This variable encodes the prototype of getlogin_r. |
| 4302 | It is zero if d_getlogin_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4303 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getlogin_r |
| 4304 | is defined. |
| 4305 | |
| 4306 | =item C<getnetbyaddr_r_proto> |
| 4307 | |
| 4308 | From F<d_getnetbyaddr_r.U>: |
| 4309 | |
| 4310 | This variable encodes the prototype of getnetbyaddr_r. |
| 4311 | It is zero if d_getnetbyaddr_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4312 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getnetbyaddr_r |
| 4313 | is defined. |
| 4314 | |
| 4315 | =item C<getnetbyname_r_proto> |
| 4316 | |
| 4317 | From F<d_getnetbyname_r.U>: |
| 4318 | |
| 4319 | This variable encodes the prototype of getnetbyname_r. |
| 4320 | It is zero if d_getnetbyname_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4321 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getnetbyname_r |
| 4322 | is defined. |
| 4323 | |
| 4324 | =item C<getnetent_r_proto> |
| 4325 | |
| 4326 | From F<d_getnetent_r.U>: |
| 4327 | |
| 4328 | This variable encodes the prototype of getnetent_r. |
| 4329 | It is zero if d_getnetent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4330 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getnetent_r |
| 4331 | is defined. |
| 4332 | |
| 4333 | =item C<getprotobyname_r_proto> |
| 4334 | |
| 4335 | From F<d_getprotobyname_r.U>: |
| 4336 | |
| 4337 | This variable encodes the prototype of getprotobyname_r. |
| 4338 | It is zero if d_getprotobyname_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4339 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getprotobyname_r |
| 4340 | is defined. |
| 4341 | |
| 4342 | =item C<getprotobynumber_r_proto> |
| 4343 | |
| 4344 | From F<d_getprotobynumber_r.U>: |
| 4345 | |
| 4346 | This variable encodes the prototype of getprotobynumber_r. |
| 4347 | It is zero if d_getprotobynumber_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4348 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getprotobynumber_r |
| 4349 | is defined. |
| 4350 | |
| 4351 | =item C<getprotoent_r_proto> |
| 4352 | |
| 4353 | From F<d_getprotoent_r.U>: |
| 4354 | |
| 4355 | This variable encodes the prototype of getprotoent_r. |
| 4356 | It is zero if d_getprotoent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4357 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getprotoent_r |
| 4358 | is defined. |
| 4359 | |
| 4360 | =item C<getpwent_r_proto> |
| 4361 | |
| 4362 | From F<d_getpwent_r.U>: |
| 4363 | |
| 4364 | This variable encodes the prototype of getpwent_r. |
| 4365 | It is zero if d_getpwent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4366 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getpwent_r |
| 4367 | is defined. |
| 4368 | |
| 4369 | =item C<getpwnam_r_proto> |
| 4370 | |
| 4371 | From F<d_getpwnam_r.U>: |
| 4372 | |
| 4373 | This variable encodes the prototype of getpwnam_r. |
| 4374 | It is zero if d_getpwnam_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4375 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getpwnam_r |
| 4376 | is defined. |
| 4377 | |
| 4378 | =item C<getpwuid_r_proto> |
| 4379 | |
| 4380 | From F<d_getpwuid_r.U>: |
| 4381 | |
| 4382 | This variable encodes the prototype of getpwuid_r. |
| 4383 | It is zero if d_getpwuid_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4384 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getpwuid_r |
| 4385 | is defined. |
| 4386 | |
| 4387 | =item C<getservbyname_r_proto> |
| 4388 | |
| 4389 | From F<d_getservbyname_r.U>: |
| 4390 | |
| 4391 | This variable encodes the prototype of getservbyname_r. |
| 4392 | It is zero if d_getservbyname_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4393 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getservbyname_r |
| 4394 | is defined. |
| 4395 | |
| 4396 | =item C<getservbyport_r_proto> |
| 4397 | |
| 4398 | From F<d_getservbyport_r.U>: |
| 4399 | |
| 4400 | This variable encodes the prototype of getservbyport_r. |
| 4401 | It is zero if d_getservbyport_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4402 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getservbyport_r |
| 4403 | is defined. |
| 4404 | |
| 4405 | =item C<getservent_r_proto> |
| 4406 | |
| 4407 | From F<d_getservent_r.U>: |
| 4408 | |
| 4409 | This variable encodes the prototype of getservent_r. |
| 4410 | It is zero if d_getservent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4411 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getservent_r |
| 4412 | is defined. |
| 4413 | |
| 4414 | =item C<getspnam_r_proto> |
| 4415 | |
| 4416 | From F<d_getspnam_r.U>: |
| 4417 | |
| 4418 | This variable encodes the prototype of getspnam_r. |
| 4419 | It is zero if d_getspnam_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4420 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_getspnam_r |
| 4421 | is defined. |
| 4422 | |
| 4423 | =item C<gidformat> |
| 4424 | |
| 4425 | From F<gidf.U>: |
| 4426 | |
| 4427 | This variable contains the format string used for printing a Gid_t. |
| 4428 | |
| 4429 | =item C<gidsign> |
| 4430 | |
| 4431 | From F<gidsign.U>: |
| 4432 | |
| 4433 | This variable contains the signedness of a gidtype. |
| 4434 | 1 for unsigned, -1 for signed. |
| 4435 | |
| 4436 | =item C<gidsize> |
| 4437 | |
| 4438 | From F<gidsize.U>: |
| 4439 | |
| 4440 | This variable contains the size of a gidtype in bytes. |
| 4441 | |
| 4442 | =item C<gidtype> |
| 4443 | |
| 4444 | From F<gidtype.U>: |
| 4445 | |
| 4446 | This variable defines Gid_t to be something like gid_t, int, |
| 4447 | ushort, or whatever type is used to declare the return type |
| 4448 | of getgid(). Typically, it is the type of group ids in the kernel. |
| 4449 | |
| 4450 | =item C<glibpth> |
| 4451 | |
| 4452 | From F<libpth.U>: |
| 4453 | |
| 4454 | This variable holds the general path (space-separated) used to |
| 4455 | find libraries. It may contain directories that do not exist on |
| 4456 | this platform, libpth is the cleaned-up version. |
| 4457 | |
| 4458 | =item C<gmake> |
| 4459 | |
| 4460 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 4461 | |
| 4462 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 4463 | full pathname (if any) of the gmake program. After Configure runs, |
| 4464 | the value is reset to a plain C<gmake> and is not useful. |
| 4465 | |
| 4466 | =item C<gmtime_r_proto> |
| 4467 | |
| 4468 | From F<d_gmtime_r.U>: |
| 4469 | |
| 4470 | This variable encodes the prototype of gmtime_r. |
| 4471 | It is zero if d_gmtime_r is undef, and one of the |
| 4472 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_gmtime_r |
| 4473 | is defined. |
| 4474 | |
| 4475 | =item C<gnulibc_version> |
| 4476 | |
| 4477 | From F<d_gnulibc.U>: |
| 4478 | |
| 4479 | This variable contains the version number of the C<GNU> C library. |
| 4480 | It is usually something like F<2.2.5>. It is a plain '' if this |
| 4481 | is not the C<GNU> C library, or if the version is unknown. |
| 4482 | |
| 4483 | =item C<grep> |
| 4484 | |
| 4485 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 4486 | |
| 4487 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 4488 | full pathname (if any) of the grep program. After Configure runs, |
| 4489 | the value is reset to a plain C<grep> and is not useful. |
| 4490 | |
| 4491 | =item C<groupcat> |
| 4492 | |
| 4493 | From F<nis.U>: |
| 4494 | |
| 4495 | This variable contains a command that produces the text of the |
| 4496 | F</etc/group> file. This is normally "cat F</etc/group>", but can be |
| 4497 | "ypcat group" when C<NIS> is used. |
| 4498 | On some systems, such as os390, there may be no equivalent |
| 4499 | command, in which case this variable is unset. |
| 4500 | |
| 4501 | =item C<groupstype> |
| 4502 | |
| 4503 | From F<groupstype.U>: |
| 4504 | |
| 4505 | This variable defines Groups_t to be something like gid_t, int, |
| 4506 | ushort, or whatever type is used for the second argument to |
| 4507 | getgroups() and setgroups(). Usually, this is the same as |
| 4508 | gidtype (gid_t), but sometimes it isn't. |
| 4509 | |
| 4510 | =item C<gzip> |
| 4511 | |
| 4512 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 4513 | |
| 4514 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 4515 | full pathname (if any) of the gzip program. After Configure runs, |
| 4516 | the value is reset to a plain C<gzip> and is not useful. |
| 4517 | |
| 4518 | =back |
| 4519 | |
| 4520 | =head2 h |
| 4521 | |
| 4522 | =over 4 |
| 4523 | |
| 4524 | =item C<h_fcntl> |
| 4525 | |
| 4526 | From F<h_fcntl.U>: |
| 4527 | |
| 4528 | This is variable gets set in various places to tell i_fcntl that |
| 4529 | <fcntl.h> should be included. |
| 4530 | |
| 4531 | =item C<h_sysfile> |
| 4532 | |
| 4533 | From F<h_sysfile.U>: |
| 4534 | |
| 4535 | This is variable gets set in various places to tell i_sys_file that |
| 4536 | <sys/file.h> should be included. |
| 4537 | |
| 4538 | =item C<hint> |
| 4539 | |
| 4540 | From F<Oldconfig.U>: |
| 4541 | |
| 4542 | Gives the type of hints used for previous answers. May be one of |
| 4543 | C<default>, C<recommended> or C<previous>. |
| 4544 | |
| 4545 | =item C<hostcat> |
| 4546 | |
| 4547 | From F<nis.U>: |
| 4548 | |
| 4549 | This variable contains a command that produces the text of the |
| 4550 | F</etc/hosts> file. This is normally "cat F</etc/hosts>", but can be |
| 4551 | "ypcat hosts" when C<NIS> is used. |
| 4552 | On some systems, such as os390, there may be no equivalent |
| 4553 | command, in which case this variable is unset. |
| 4554 | |
| 4555 | =item C<html1dir> |
| 4556 | |
| 4557 | From F<html1dir.U>: |
| 4558 | |
| 4559 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which html |
| 4560 | source pages are to be put. This directory is for pages |
| 4561 | that describe whole programs, not libraries or modules. It |
| 4562 | is intended to correspond roughly to section 1 of the Unix |
| 4563 | manuals. |
| 4564 | |
| 4565 | =item C<html1direxp> |
| 4566 | |
| 4567 | From F<html1dir.U>: |
| 4568 | |
| 4569 | This variable is the same as the html1dir variable, but is filename |
| 4570 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. |
| 4571 | |
| 4572 | =item C<html3dir> |
| 4573 | |
| 4574 | From F<html3dir.U>: |
| 4575 | |
| 4576 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which html |
| 4577 | source pages are to be put. This directory is for pages |
| 4578 | that describe libraries or modules. It is intended to |
| 4579 | correspond roughly to section 3 of the Unix manuals. |
| 4580 | |
| 4581 | =item C<html3direxp> |
| 4582 | |
| 4583 | From F<html3dir.U>: |
| 4584 | |
| 4585 | This variable is the same as the html3dir variable, but is filename |
| 4586 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. |
| 4587 | |
| 4588 | =back |
| 4589 | |
| 4590 | =head2 i |
| 4591 | |
| 4592 | =over 4 |
| 4593 | |
| 4594 | =item C<i16size> |
| 4595 | |
| 4596 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 4597 | |
| 4598 | This variable is the size of an I16 in bytes. |
| 4599 | |
| 4600 | =item C<i16type> |
| 4601 | |
| 4602 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 4603 | |
| 4604 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's I16. |
| 4605 | |
| 4606 | =item C<i32size> |
| 4607 | |
| 4608 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 4609 | |
| 4610 | This variable is the size of an I32 in bytes. |
| 4611 | |
| 4612 | =item C<i32type> |
| 4613 | |
| 4614 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 4615 | |
| 4616 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's I32. |
| 4617 | |
| 4618 | =item C<i64size> |
| 4619 | |
| 4620 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 4621 | |
| 4622 | This variable is the size of an I64 in bytes. |
| 4623 | |
| 4624 | =item C<i64type> |
| 4625 | |
| 4626 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 4627 | |
| 4628 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's I64. |
| 4629 | |
| 4630 | =item C<i8size> |
| 4631 | |
| 4632 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 4633 | |
| 4634 | This variable is the size of an I8 in bytes. |
| 4635 | |
| 4636 | =item C<i8type> |
| 4637 | |
| 4638 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 4639 | |
| 4640 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's I8. |
| 4641 | |
| 4642 | =item C<i_arpainet> |
| 4643 | |
| 4644 | From F<i_arpainet.U>: |
| 4645 | |
| 4646 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_ARPA_INET> symbol, |
| 4647 | and indicates whether a C program should include <arpa/inet.h>. |
| 4648 | |
| 4649 | =item C<i_bsdioctl> |
| 4650 | |
| 4651 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>: |
| 4652 | |
| 4653 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_BSDIOCTL> symbol, which |
| 4654 | indicates to the C program that <sys/bsdioctl.h> exists and should |
| 4655 | be included. |
| 4656 | |
| 4657 | =item C<i_crypt> |
| 4658 | |
| 4659 | From F<i_crypt.U>: |
| 4660 | |
| 4661 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_CRYPT> symbol, and indicates |
| 4662 | whether a C program should include <crypt.h>. |
| 4663 | |
| 4664 | =item C<i_db> |
| 4665 | |
| 4666 | From F<i_db.U>: |
| 4667 | |
| 4668 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_DB> symbol, and indicates |
| 4669 | whether a C program may include Berkeley's C<DB> include file <db.h>. |
| 4670 | |
| 4671 | =item C<i_dbm> |
| 4672 | |
| 4673 | From F<i_dbm.U>: |
| 4674 | |
| 4675 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_DBM> symbol, which |
| 4676 | indicates to the C program that <dbm.h> exists and should |
| 4677 | be included. |
| 4678 | |
| 4679 | =item C<i_dirent> |
| 4680 | |
| 4681 | From F<i_dirent.U>: |
| 4682 | |
| 4683 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_DIRENT>, which indicates |
| 4684 | to the C program that it should include <dirent.h>. |
| 4685 | |
| 4686 | =item C<i_dld> |
| 4687 | |
| 4688 | From F<i_dld.U>: |
| 4689 | |
| 4690 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_DLD> symbol, which |
| 4691 | indicates to the C program that <dld.h> (C<GNU> dynamic loading) |
| 4692 | exists and should be included. |
| 4693 | |
| 4694 | =item C<i_dlfcn> |
| 4695 | |
| 4696 | From F<i_dlfcn.U>: |
| 4697 | |
| 4698 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_DLFCN> symbol, which |
| 4699 | indicates to the C program that <dlfcn.h> exists and should |
| 4700 | be included. |
| 4701 | |
| 4702 | =item C<i_fcntl> |
| 4703 | |
| 4704 | From F<i_fcntl.U>: |
| 4705 | |
| 4706 | This variable controls the value of C<I_FCNTL> (which tells |
| 4707 | the C program to include <fcntl.h>). |
| 4708 | |
| 4709 | =item C<i_float> |
| 4710 | |
| 4711 | From F<i_float.U>: |
| 4712 | |
| 4713 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_FLOAT> symbol, and indicates |
| 4714 | whether a C program may include <float.h> to get symbols like C<DBL_MAX> |
| 4715 | or C<DBL_MIN>, F<i.e>. machine dependent floating point values. |
| 4716 | |
| 4717 | =item C<i_fp> |
| 4718 | |
| 4719 | From F<i_fp.U>: |
| 4720 | |
| 4721 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_FP> symbol, and indicates |
| 4722 | whether a C program should include <fp.h>. |
| 4723 | |
| 4724 | =item C<i_fp_class> |
| 4725 | |
| 4726 | From F<i_fp_class.U>: |
| 4727 | |
| 4728 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_FP_CLASS> symbol, and indicates |
| 4729 | whether a C program should include <fp_class.h>. |
| 4730 | |
| 4731 | =item C<i_gdbm> |
| 4732 | |
| 4733 | From F<i_gdbm.U>: |
| 4734 | |
| 4735 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_GDBM> symbol, which |
| 4736 | indicates to the C program that <gdbm.h> exists and should |
| 4737 | be included. |
| 4738 | |
| 4739 | =item C<i_grp> |
| 4740 | |
| 4741 | From F<i_grp.U>: |
| 4742 | |
| 4743 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_GRP> symbol, and indicates |
| 4744 | whether a C program should include <grp.h>. |
| 4745 | |
| 4746 | =item C<i_ieeefp> |
| 4747 | |
| 4748 | From F<i_ieeefp.U>: |
| 4749 | |
| 4750 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_IEEEFP> symbol, and indicates |
| 4751 | whether a C program should include <ieeefp.h>. |
| 4752 | |
| 4753 | =item C<i_inttypes> |
| 4754 | |
| 4755 | From F<i_inttypes.U>: |
| 4756 | |
| 4757 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_INTTYPES> symbol, |
| 4758 | and indicates whether a C program should include <inttypes.h>. |
| 4759 | |
| 4760 | =item C<i_langinfo> |
| 4761 | |
| 4762 | From F<i_langinfo.U>: |
| 4763 | |
| 4764 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_LANGINFO> symbol, |
| 4765 | and indicates whether a C program should include <langinfo.h>. |
| 4766 | |
| 4767 | =item C<i_libutil> |
| 4768 | |
| 4769 | From F<i_libutil.U>: |
| 4770 | |
| 4771 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_LIBUTIL> symbol, and indicates |
| 4772 | whether a C program should include <libutil.h>. |
| 4773 | |
| 4774 | =item C<i_limits> |
| 4775 | |
| 4776 | From F<i_limits.U>: |
| 4777 | |
| 4778 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_LIMITS> symbol, and indicates |
| 4779 | whether a C program may include <limits.h> to get symbols like C<WORD_BIT> |
| 4780 | and friends. |
| 4781 | |
| 4782 | =item C<i_locale> |
| 4783 | |
| 4784 | From F<i_locale.U>: |
| 4785 | |
| 4786 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_LOCALE> symbol, |
| 4787 | and indicates whether a C program should include <locale.h>. |
| 4788 | |
| 4789 | =item C<i_machcthr> |
| 4790 | |
| 4791 | From F<i_machcthr.U>: |
| 4792 | |
| 4793 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MACH_CTHREADS> symbol, |
| 4794 | and indicates whether a C program should include <mach/cthreads.h>. |
| 4795 | |
| 4796 | =item C<i_malloc> |
| 4797 | |
| 4798 | From F<i_malloc.U>: |
| 4799 | |
| 4800 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MALLOC> symbol, and indicates |
| 4801 | whether a C program should include <malloc.h>. |
| 4802 | |
| 4803 | =item C<i_math> |
| 4804 | |
| 4805 | From F<i_math.U>: |
| 4806 | |
| 4807 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MATH> symbol, and indicates |
| 4808 | whether a C program may include <math.h>. |
| 4809 | |
| 4810 | =item C<i_memory> |
| 4811 | |
| 4812 | From F<i_memory.U>: |
| 4813 | |
| 4814 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MEMORY> symbol, and indicates |
| 4815 | whether a C program should include <memory.h>. |
| 4816 | |
| 4817 | =item C<i_mntent> |
| 4818 | |
| 4819 | From F<i_mntent.U>: |
| 4820 | |
| 4821 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_MNTENT> symbol, and indicates |
| 4822 | whether a C program should include <mntent.h>. |
| 4823 | |
| 4824 | =item C<i_ndbm> |
| 4825 | |
| 4826 | From F<i_ndbm.U>: |
| 4827 | |
| 4828 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_NDBM> symbol, which |
| 4829 | indicates to the C program that <ndbm.h> exists and should |
| 4830 | be included. |
| 4831 | |
| 4832 | =item C<i_netdb> |
| 4833 | |
| 4834 | From F<i_netdb.U>: |
| 4835 | |
| 4836 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_NETDB> symbol, and indicates |
| 4837 | whether a C program should include <netdb.h>. |
| 4838 | |
| 4839 | =item C<i_neterrno> |
| 4840 | |
| 4841 | From F<i_neterrno.U>: |
| 4842 | |
| 4843 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_NET_ERRNO> symbol, which |
| 4844 | indicates to the C program that <net/errno.h> exists and should |
| 4845 | be included. |
| 4846 | |
| 4847 | =item C<i_netinettcp> |
| 4848 | |
| 4849 | From F<i_netinettcp.U>: |
| 4850 | |
| 4851 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_NETINET_TCP> symbol, |
| 4852 | and indicates whether a C program should include <netinet/tcp.h>. |
| 4853 | |
| 4854 | =item C<i_niin> |
| 4855 | |
| 4856 | From F<i_niin.U>: |
| 4857 | |
| 4858 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_NETINET_IN>, which indicates |
| 4859 | to the C program that it should include <netinet/in.h>. Otherwise, |
| 4860 | you may try <sys/in.h>. |
| 4861 | |
| 4862 | =item C<i_poll> |
| 4863 | |
| 4864 | From F<i_poll.U>: |
| 4865 | |
| 4866 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_POLL> symbol, and indicates |
| 4867 | whether a C program should include <poll.h>. |
| 4868 | |
| 4869 | =item C<i_prot> |
| 4870 | |
| 4871 | From F<i_prot.U>: |
| 4872 | |
| 4873 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_PROT> symbol, and indicates |
| 4874 | whether a C program should include <prot.h>. |
| 4875 | |
| 4876 | =item C<i_pthread> |
| 4877 | |
| 4878 | From F<i_pthread.U>: |
| 4879 | |
| 4880 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_PTHREAD> symbol, |
| 4881 | and indicates whether a C program should include <pthread.h>. |
| 4882 | |
| 4883 | =item C<i_pwd> |
| 4884 | |
| 4885 | From F<i_pwd.U>: |
| 4886 | |
| 4887 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_PWD>, which indicates |
| 4888 | to the C program that it should include <pwd.h>. |
| 4889 | |
| 4890 | =item C<i_rpcsvcdbm> |
| 4891 | |
| 4892 | From F<i_dbm.U>: |
| 4893 | |
| 4894 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_RPCSVC_DBM> symbol, which |
| 4895 | indicates to the C program that <rpcsvc/dbm.h> exists and should |
| 4896 | be included. Some System V systems might need this instead of <dbm.h>. |
| 4897 | |
| 4898 | =item C<i_sfio> |
| 4899 | |
| 4900 | From F<i_sfio.U>: |
| 4901 | |
| 4902 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SFIO> symbol, |
| 4903 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sfio.h>. |
| 4904 | |
| 4905 | =item C<i_sgtty> |
| 4906 | |
| 4907 | From F<i_termio.U>: |
| 4908 | |
| 4909 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SGTTY> symbol, which |
| 4910 | indicates to the C program that it should include <sgtty.h> rather |
| 4911 | than <termio.h>. |
| 4912 | |
| 4913 | =item C<i_shadow> |
| 4914 | |
| 4915 | From F<i_shadow.U>: |
| 4916 | |
| 4917 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SHADOW> symbol, and indicates |
| 4918 | whether a C program should include <shadow.h>. |
| 4919 | |
| 4920 | =item C<i_socks> |
| 4921 | |
| 4922 | From F<i_socks.U>: |
| 4923 | |
| 4924 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SOCKS> symbol, and indicates |
| 4925 | whether a C program should include <socks.h>. |
| 4926 | |
| 4927 | =item C<i_stdarg> |
| 4928 | |
| 4929 | From F<i_varhdr.U>: |
| 4930 | |
| 4931 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_STDARG> symbol, which |
| 4932 | indicates to the C program that <stdarg.h> exists and should |
| 4933 | be included. |
| 4934 | |
| 4935 | =item C<i_stddef> |
| 4936 | |
| 4937 | From F<i_stddef.U>: |
| 4938 | |
| 4939 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_STDDEF> symbol, which |
| 4940 | indicates to the C program that <stddef.h> exists and should |
| 4941 | be included. |
| 4942 | |
| 4943 | =item C<i_stdlib> |
| 4944 | |
| 4945 | From F<i_stdlib.U>: |
| 4946 | |
| 4947 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_STDLIB> symbol, which |
| 4948 | indicates to the C program that <stdlib.h> exists and should |
| 4949 | be included. |
| 4950 | |
| 4951 | =item C<i_string> |
| 4952 | |
| 4953 | From F<i_string.U>: |
| 4954 | |
| 4955 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_STRING> symbol, which |
| 4956 | indicates that <string.h> should be included rather than <strings.h>. |
| 4957 | |
| 4958 | =item C<i_sunmath> |
| 4959 | |
| 4960 | From F<i_sunmath.U>: |
| 4961 | |
| 4962 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SUNMATH> symbol, and indicates |
| 4963 | whether a C program should include <sunmath.h>. |
| 4964 | |
| 4965 | =item C<i_sysaccess> |
| 4966 | |
| 4967 | From F<i_sysaccess.U>: |
| 4968 | |
| 4969 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_ACCESS> symbol, |
| 4970 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/access.h>. |
| 4971 | |
| 4972 | =item C<i_sysdir> |
| 4973 | |
| 4974 | From F<i_sysdir.U>: |
| 4975 | |
| 4976 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_DIR> symbol, and indicates |
| 4977 | whether a C program should include <sys/dir.h>. |
| 4978 | |
| 4979 | =item C<i_sysfile> |
| 4980 | |
| 4981 | From F<i_sysfile.U>: |
| 4982 | |
| 4983 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_FILE> symbol, and indicates |
| 4984 | whether a C program should include <sys/file.h> to get C<R_OK> and friends. |
| 4985 | |
| 4986 | =item C<i_sysfilio> |
| 4987 | |
| 4988 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>: |
| 4989 | |
| 4990 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_FILIO> symbol, which |
| 4991 | indicates to the C program that <sys/filio.h> exists and should |
| 4992 | be included in preference to <sys/ioctl.h>. |
| 4993 | |
| 4994 | =item C<i_sysin> |
| 4995 | |
| 4996 | From F<i_niin.U>: |
| 4997 | |
| 4998 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_IN>, which indicates |
| 4999 | to the C program that it should include <sys/in.h> instead of |
| 5000 | <netinet/in.h>. |
| 5001 | |
| 5002 | =item C<i_sysioctl> |
| 5003 | |
| 5004 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>: |
| 5005 | |
| 5006 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_IOCTL> symbol, which |
| 5007 | indicates to the C program that <sys/ioctl.h> exists and should |
| 5008 | be included. |
| 5009 | |
| 5010 | =item C<i_syslog> |
| 5011 | |
| 5012 | From F<i_syslog.U>: |
| 5013 | |
| 5014 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSLOG> symbol, |
| 5015 | and indicates whether a C program should include <syslog.h>. |
| 5016 | |
| 5017 | =item C<i_sysmman> |
| 5018 | |
| 5019 | From F<i_sysmman.U>: |
| 5020 | |
| 5021 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_MMAN> symbol, and |
| 5022 | indicates whether a C program should include <sys/mman.h>. |
| 5023 | |
| 5024 | =item C<i_sysmode> |
| 5025 | |
| 5026 | From F<i_sysmode.U>: |
| 5027 | |
| 5028 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSMODE> symbol, |
| 5029 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/mode.h>. |
| 5030 | |
| 5031 | =item C<i_sysmount> |
| 5032 | |
| 5033 | From F<i_sysmount.U>: |
| 5034 | |
| 5035 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSMOUNT> symbol, |
| 5036 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/mount.h>. |
| 5037 | |
| 5038 | =item C<i_sysndir> |
| 5039 | |
| 5040 | From F<i_sysndir.U>: |
| 5041 | |
| 5042 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_NDIR> symbol, and indicates |
| 5043 | whether a C program should include <sys/ndir.h>. |
| 5044 | |
| 5045 | =item C<i_sysparam> |
| 5046 | |
| 5047 | From F<i_sysparam.U>: |
| 5048 | |
| 5049 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_PARAM> symbol, and indicates |
| 5050 | whether a C program should include <sys/param.h>. |
| 5051 | |
| 5052 | =item C<i_sysresrc> |
| 5053 | |
| 5054 | From F<i_sysresrc.U>: |
| 5055 | |
| 5056 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_RESOURCE> symbol, |
| 5057 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/resource.h>. |
| 5058 | |
| 5059 | =item C<i_syssecrt> |
| 5060 | |
| 5061 | From F<i_syssecrt.U>: |
| 5062 | |
| 5063 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_SECURITY> symbol, |
| 5064 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/security.h>. |
| 5065 | |
| 5066 | =item C<i_sysselct> |
| 5067 | |
| 5068 | From F<i_sysselct.U>: |
| 5069 | |
| 5070 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_SELECT>, which indicates |
| 5071 | to the C program that it should include <sys/select.h> in order to |
| 5072 | get the definition of struct timeval. |
| 5073 | |
| 5074 | =item C<i_syssockio> |
| 5075 | |
| 5076 | From F<i_sysioctl.U>: |
| 5077 | |
| 5078 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_SOCKIO> to indicate to the |
| 5079 | C program that socket ioctl codes may be found in <sys/sockio.h> |
| 5080 | instead of <sys/ioctl.h>. |
| 5081 | |
| 5082 | =item C<i_sysstat> |
| 5083 | |
| 5084 | From F<i_sysstat.U>: |
| 5085 | |
| 5086 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_STAT> symbol, |
| 5087 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/stat.h>. |
| 5088 | |
| 5089 | =item C<i_sysstatfs> |
| 5090 | |
| 5091 | From F<i_sysstatfs.U>: |
| 5092 | |
| 5093 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSSTATFS> symbol, |
| 5094 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/statfs.h>. |
| 5095 | |
| 5096 | =item C<i_sysstatvfs> |
| 5097 | |
| 5098 | From F<i_sysstatvfs.U>: |
| 5099 | |
| 5100 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSSTATVFS> symbol, |
| 5101 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/statvfs.h>. |
| 5102 | |
| 5103 | =item C<i_systime> |
| 5104 | |
| 5105 | From F<i_time.U>: |
| 5106 | |
| 5107 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_TIME>, which indicates |
| 5108 | to the C program that it should include <sys/time.h>. |
| 5109 | |
| 5110 | =item C<i_systimek> |
| 5111 | |
| 5112 | From F<i_time.U>: |
| 5113 | |
| 5114 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_TIME_KERNEL>, which |
| 5115 | indicates to the C program that it should include <sys/time.h> |
| 5116 | with C<KERNEL> defined. |
| 5117 | |
| 5118 | =item C<i_systimes> |
| 5119 | |
| 5120 | From F<i_systimes.U>: |
| 5121 | |
| 5122 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_TIMES> symbol, and indicates |
| 5123 | whether a C program should include <sys/times.h>. |
| 5124 | |
| 5125 | =item C<i_systypes> |
| 5126 | |
| 5127 | From F<i_systypes.U>: |
| 5128 | |
| 5129 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYS_TYPES> symbol, |
| 5130 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/types.h>. |
| 5131 | |
| 5132 | =item C<i_sysuio> |
| 5133 | |
| 5134 | From F<i_sysuio.U>: |
| 5135 | |
| 5136 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSUIO> symbol, and indicates |
| 5137 | whether a C program should include <sys/uio.h>. |
| 5138 | |
| 5139 | =item C<i_sysun> |
| 5140 | |
| 5141 | From F<i_sysun.U>: |
| 5142 | |
| 5143 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_UN>, which indicates |
| 5144 | to the C program that it should include <sys/un.h> to get C<UNIX> |
| 5145 | domain socket definitions. |
| 5146 | |
| 5147 | =item C<i_sysutsname> |
| 5148 | |
| 5149 | From F<i_sysutsname.U>: |
| 5150 | |
| 5151 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSUTSNAME> symbol, |
| 5152 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/utsname.h>. |
| 5153 | |
| 5154 | =item C<i_sysvfs> |
| 5155 | |
| 5156 | From F<i_sysvfs.U>: |
| 5157 | |
| 5158 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_SYSVFS> symbol, |
| 5159 | and indicates whether a C program should include <sys/vfs.h>. |
| 5160 | |
| 5161 | =item C<i_syswait> |
| 5162 | |
| 5163 | From F<i_syswait.U>: |
| 5164 | |
| 5165 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_SYS_WAIT>, which indicates |
| 5166 | to the C program that it should include <sys/wait.h>. |
| 5167 | |
| 5168 | =item C<i_termio> |
| 5169 | |
| 5170 | From F<i_termio.U>: |
| 5171 | |
| 5172 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_TERMIO> symbol, which |
| 5173 | indicates to the C program that it should include <termio.h> rather |
| 5174 | than <sgtty.h>. |
| 5175 | |
| 5176 | =item C<i_termios> |
| 5177 | |
| 5178 | From F<i_termio.U>: |
| 5179 | |
| 5180 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_TERMIOS> symbol, which |
| 5181 | indicates to the C program that the C<POSIX> <termios.h> file is |
| 5182 | to be included. |
| 5183 | |
| 5184 | =item C<i_time> |
| 5185 | |
| 5186 | From F<i_time.U>: |
| 5187 | |
| 5188 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_TIME>, which indicates |
| 5189 | to the C program that it should include <time.h>. |
| 5190 | |
| 5191 | =item C<i_unistd> |
| 5192 | |
| 5193 | From F<i_unistd.U>: |
| 5194 | |
| 5195 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_UNISTD> symbol, and indicates |
| 5196 | whether a C program should include <unistd.h>. |
| 5197 | |
| 5198 | =item C<i_ustat> |
| 5199 | |
| 5200 | From F<i_ustat.U>: |
| 5201 | |
| 5202 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_USTAT> symbol, and indicates |
| 5203 | whether a C program should include <ustat.h>. |
| 5204 | |
| 5205 | =item C<i_utime> |
| 5206 | |
| 5207 | From F<i_utime.U>: |
| 5208 | |
| 5209 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_UTIME> symbol, and indicates |
| 5210 | whether a C program should include <utime.h>. |
| 5211 | |
| 5212 | =item C<i_values> |
| 5213 | |
| 5214 | From F<i_values.U>: |
| 5215 | |
| 5216 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_VALUES> symbol, and indicates |
| 5217 | whether a C program may include <values.h> to get symbols like C<MAXLONG> |
| 5218 | and friends. |
| 5219 | |
| 5220 | =item C<i_varargs> |
| 5221 | |
| 5222 | From F<i_varhdr.U>: |
| 5223 | |
| 5224 | This variable conditionally defines C<I_VARARGS>, which indicates |
| 5225 | to the C program that it should include <varargs.h>. |
| 5226 | |
| 5227 | =item C<i_varhdr> |
| 5228 | |
| 5229 | From F<i_varhdr.U>: |
| 5230 | |
| 5231 | Contains the name of the header to be included to get va_dcl definition. |
| 5232 | Typically one of F<varargs.h> or F<stdarg.h>. |
| 5233 | |
| 5234 | =item C<i_vfork> |
| 5235 | |
| 5236 | From F<i_vfork.U>: |
| 5237 | |
| 5238 | This variable conditionally defines the C<I_VFORK> symbol, and indicates |
| 5239 | whether a C program should include F<vfork.h>. |
| 5240 | |
| 5241 | =item C<ignore_versioned_solibs> |
| 5242 | |
| 5243 | From F<libs.U>: |
| 5244 | |
| 5245 | This variable should be non-empty if non-versioned shared |
| 5246 | libraries (F<libfoo.so.x.y>) are to be ignored (because they |
| 5247 | cannot be linked against). |
| 5248 | |
| 5249 | =item C<inc_version_list> |
| 5250 | |
| 5251 | From F<inc_version_list.U>: |
| 5252 | |
| 5253 | This variable specifies the list of subdirectories in over |
| 5254 | which F<perl.c>:incpush() and F<lib/lib.pm> will automatically |
| 5255 | search when adding directories to @C<INC>. The elements in |
| 5256 | the list are separated by spaces. This is only useful |
| 5257 | if you have a perl library directory tree structured like the |
| 5258 | default one. See C<INSTALL> for how this works. The versioned |
| 5259 | site_perl directory was introduced in 5.005, so that is the |
| 5260 | lowest possible value. |
| 5261 | |
| 5262 | =item C<inc_version_list_init> |
| 5263 | |
| 5264 | From F<inc_version_list.U>: |
| 5265 | |
| 5266 | This variable holds the same list as inc_version_list, but |
| 5267 | each item is enclosed in double quotes and separated by commas, |
| 5268 | suitable for use in the C<PERL_INC_VERSION_LIST> initialization. |
| 5269 | |
| 5270 | =item C<incpath> |
| 5271 | |
| 5272 | From F<usrinc.U>: |
| 5273 | |
| 5274 | This variable must preceed the normal include path to get hte |
| 5275 | right one, as in F<$F<incpath/usr/include>> or F<$F<incpath/usr/lib>>. |
| 5276 | Value can be "" or F</bsd43> on mips. |
| 5277 | |
| 5278 | =item C<inews> |
| 5279 | |
| 5280 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 5281 | |
| 5282 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 5283 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 5284 | |
| 5285 | =item C<installarchlib> |
| 5286 | |
| 5287 | From F<archlib.U>: |
| 5288 | |
| 5289 | This variable is really the same as archlibexp but may differ on |
| 5290 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable |
| 5291 | should be used in makefiles. |
| 5292 | |
| 5293 | =item C<installbin> |
| 5294 | |
| 5295 | From F<bin.U>: |
| 5296 | |
| 5297 | This variable is the same as binexp unless C<AFS> is running in which case |
| 5298 | the user is explicitely prompted for it. This variable should always |
| 5299 | be used in your makefiles for maximum portability. |
| 5300 | |
| 5301 | =item C<installhtml1dir> |
| 5302 | |
| 5303 | From F<html1dir.U>: |
| 5304 | |
| 5305 | This variable is really the same as html1direxp, unless you are |
| 5306 | using a different installprefix. For extra portability, you |
| 5307 | should only use this variable within your makefiles. |
| 5308 | |
| 5309 | =item C<installhtml3dir> |
| 5310 | |
| 5311 | From F<html3dir.U>: |
| 5312 | |
| 5313 | This variable is really the same as html3direxp, unless you are |
| 5314 | using a different installprefix. For extra portability, you |
| 5315 | should only use this variable within your makefiles. |
| 5316 | |
| 5317 | =item C<installman1dir> |
| 5318 | |
| 5319 | From F<man1dir.U>: |
| 5320 | |
| 5321 | This variable is really the same as man1direxp, unless you are using |
| 5322 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas |
| 5323 | man1direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra |
| 5324 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles. |
| 5325 | |
| 5326 | =item C<installman3dir> |
| 5327 | |
| 5328 | From F<man3dir.U>: |
| 5329 | |
| 5330 | This variable is really the same as man3direxp, unless you are using |
| 5331 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas |
| 5332 | man3direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra |
| 5333 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles. |
| 5334 | |
| 5335 | =item C<installprefix> |
| 5336 | |
| 5337 | From F<installprefix.U>: |
| 5338 | |
| 5339 | This variable holds the name of the directory below which |
| 5340 | "make install" will install the package. For most users, this |
| 5341 | is the same as prefix. However, it is useful for |
| 5342 | installing the software into a different (usually temporary) |
| 5343 | location after which it can be bundled up and moved somehow |
| 5344 | to the final location specified by prefix. |
| 5345 | |
| 5346 | =item C<installprefixexp> |
| 5347 | |
| 5348 | From F<installprefix.U>: |
| 5349 | |
| 5350 | This variable holds the full absolute path of installprefix |
| 5351 | with all F<~>-expansion done. |
| 5352 | |
| 5353 | =item C<installprivlib> |
| 5354 | |
| 5355 | From F<privlib.U>: |
| 5356 | |
| 5357 | This variable is really the same as privlibexp but may differ on |
| 5358 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable |
| 5359 | should be used in makefiles. |
| 5360 | |
| 5361 | =item C<installscript> |
| 5362 | |
| 5363 | From F<scriptdir.U>: |
| 5364 | |
| 5365 | This variable is usually the same as scriptdirexp, unless you are on |
| 5366 | a system running C<AFS>, in which case they may differ slightly. You |
| 5367 | should always use this variable within your makefiles for portability. |
| 5368 | |
| 5369 | =item C<installsitearch> |
| 5370 | |
| 5371 | From F<sitearch.U>: |
| 5372 | |
| 5373 | This variable is really the same as sitearchexp but may differ on |
| 5374 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable |
| 5375 | should be used in makefiles. |
| 5376 | |
| 5377 | =item C<installsitebin> |
| 5378 | |
| 5379 | From F<sitebin.U>: |
| 5380 | |
| 5381 | This variable is usually the same as sitebinexp, unless you are on |
| 5382 | a system running C<AFS>, in which case they may differ slightly. You |
| 5383 | should always use this variable within your makefiles for portability. |
| 5384 | |
| 5385 | =item C<installsitehtml1dir> |
| 5386 | |
| 5387 | From F<sitehtml1dir.U>: |
| 5388 | |
| 5389 | This variable is really the same as sitehtml1direxp, unless you are using |
| 5390 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas |
| 5391 | html1direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra |
| 5392 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles. |
| 5393 | |
| 5394 | =item C<installsitehtml3dir> |
| 5395 | |
| 5396 | From F<sitehtml3dir.U>: |
| 5397 | |
| 5398 | This variable is really the same as sitehtml3direxp, unless you are using |
| 5399 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas |
| 5400 | html3direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra |
| 5401 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles. |
| 5402 | |
| 5403 | =item C<installsitelib> |
| 5404 | |
| 5405 | From F<sitelib.U>: |
| 5406 | |
| 5407 | This variable is really the same as sitelibexp but may differ on |
| 5408 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable |
| 5409 | should be used in makefiles. |
| 5410 | |
| 5411 | =item C<installsiteman1dir> |
| 5412 | |
| 5413 | From F<siteman1dir.U>: |
| 5414 | |
| 5415 | This variable is really the same as siteman1direxp, unless you are using |
| 5416 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas |
| 5417 | man1direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra |
| 5418 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles. |
| 5419 | |
| 5420 | =item C<installsiteman3dir> |
| 5421 | |
| 5422 | From F<siteman3dir.U>: |
| 5423 | |
| 5424 | This variable is really the same as siteman3direxp, unless you are using |
| 5425 | C<AFS> in which case it points to the read/write location whereas |
| 5426 | man3direxp only points to the read-only access location. For extra |
| 5427 | portability, you should only use this variable within your makefiles. |
| 5428 | |
| 5429 | =item C<installsitescript> |
| 5430 | |
| 5431 | From F<sitescript.U>: |
| 5432 | |
| 5433 | This variable is usually the same as sitescriptexp, unless you are on |
| 5434 | a system running C<AFS>, in which case they may differ slightly. You |
| 5435 | should always use this variable within your makefiles for portability. |
| 5436 | |
| 5437 | =item C<installstyle> |
| 5438 | |
| 5439 | From F<installstyle.U>: |
| 5440 | |
| 5441 | This variable describes the C<style> of the perl installation. |
| 5442 | This is intended to be useful for tools that need to |
| 5443 | manipulate entire perl distributions. Perl itself doesn't use |
| 5444 | this to find its libraries -- the library directories are |
| 5445 | stored directly in F<Config.pm>. Currently, there are only two |
| 5446 | styles: C<lib> and F<lib/perl5>. The default library locations |
| 5447 | (e.g. privlib, sitelib) are either F<$prefix/lib> or |
| 5448 | F<$prefix/lib/perl5>. The former is useful if $prefix is a |
| 5449 | directory dedicated to perl (e.g. F</opt/perl>), while the latter |
| 5450 | is useful if $prefix is shared by many packages, e.g. if |
| 5451 | $prefix=F</usr/local>. |
| 5452 | |
| 5453 | Unfortunately, while this C<style> variable is used to set |
| 5454 | defaults for all three directory hierarchies (core, vendor, and |
| 5455 | site), there is no guarantee that the same style is actually |
| 5456 | appropriate for all those directories. For example, $prefix |
| 5457 | might be F</opt/perl>, but $siteprefix might be F</usr/local>. |
| 5458 | (Perhaps, in retrospect, the C<lib> style should never have been |
| 5459 | supported, but it did seem like a nice idea at the time.) |
| 5460 | |
| 5461 | The situation is even less clear for tools such as MakeMaker |
| 5462 | that can be used to install additional modules into |
| 5463 | non-standard places. For example, if a user intends to install |
| 5464 | a module into a private directory (perhaps by setting C<PREFIX> on |
| 5465 | the F<Makefile.PL> command line), then there is no reason to |
| 5466 | assume that the Configure-time $installstyle setting will be |
| 5467 | relevant for that C<PREFIX>. |
| 5468 | |
| 5469 | This may later be extended to include other information, so |
| 5470 | be careful with pattern-matching on the results. |
| 5471 | |
| 5472 | For compatibility with F<perl5.005> and earlier, the default |
| 5473 | setting is based on whether or not $prefix contains the string |
| 5474 | C<perl>. |
| 5475 | |
| 5476 | =item C<installusrbinperl> |
| 5477 | |
| 5478 | From F<instubperl.U>: |
| 5479 | |
| 5480 | This variable tells whether Perl should be installed also as |
| 5481 | F</usr/bin/perl> in addition to |
| 5482 | F<$installbin/perl> |
| 5483 | |
| 5484 | =item C<installvendorarch> |
| 5485 | |
| 5486 | From F<vendorarch.U>: |
| 5487 | |
| 5488 | This variable is really the same as vendorarchexp but may differ on |
| 5489 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable |
| 5490 | should be used in makefiles. |
| 5491 | |
| 5492 | =item C<installvendorbin> |
| 5493 | |
| 5494 | From F<vendorbin.U>: |
| 5495 | |
| 5496 | This variable is really the same as vendorbinexp but may differ on |
| 5497 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable |
| 5498 | should be used in makefiles. |
| 5499 | |
| 5500 | =item C<installvendorhtml1dir> |
| 5501 | |
| 5502 | From F<vendorhtml1dir.U>: |
| 5503 | |
| 5504 | This variable is really the same as vendorhtml1direxp but may differ on |
| 5505 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable |
| 5506 | should be used in makefiles. |
| 5507 | |
| 5508 | =item C<installvendorhtml3dir> |
| 5509 | |
| 5510 | From F<vendorhtml3dir.U>: |
| 5511 | |
| 5512 | This variable is really the same as vendorhtml3direxp but may differ on |
| 5513 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable |
| 5514 | should be used in makefiles. |
| 5515 | |
| 5516 | =item C<installvendorlib> |
| 5517 | |
| 5518 | From F<vendorlib.U>: |
| 5519 | |
| 5520 | This variable is really the same as vendorlibexp but may differ on |
| 5521 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable |
| 5522 | should be used in makefiles. |
| 5523 | |
| 5524 | =item C<installvendorman1dir> |
| 5525 | |
| 5526 | From F<vendorman1dir.U>: |
| 5527 | |
| 5528 | This variable is really the same as vendorman1direxp but may differ on |
| 5529 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable |
| 5530 | should be used in makefiles. |
| 5531 | |
| 5532 | =item C<installvendorman3dir> |
| 5533 | |
| 5534 | From F<vendorman3dir.U>: |
| 5535 | |
| 5536 | This variable is really the same as vendorman3direxp but may differ on |
| 5537 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable |
| 5538 | should be used in makefiles. |
| 5539 | |
| 5540 | =item C<installvendorscript> |
| 5541 | |
| 5542 | From F<vendorscript.U>: |
| 5543 | |
| 5544 | This variable is really the same as vendorscriptexp but may differ on |
| 5545 | those systems using C<AFS>. For extra portability, only this variable |
| 5546 | should be used in makefiles. |
| 5547 | |
| 5548 | =item C<intsize> |
| 5549 | |
| 5550 | From F<intsize.U>: |
| 5551 | |
| 5552 | This variable contains the value of the C<INTSIZE> symbol, which |
| 5553 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in an int. |
| 5554 | |
| 5555 | =item C<issymlink> |
| 5556 | |
| 5557 | From F<issymlink.U>: |
| 5558 | |
| 5559 | This variable holds the test command to test for a symbolic link |
| 5560 | (if they are supported). Typical values include C<test -h> and |
| 5561 | C<test -L>. |
| 5562 | |
| 5563 | =item C<ivdformat> |
| 5564 | |
| 5565 | From F<perlxvf.U>: |
| 5566 | |
| 5567 | This variable contains the format string used for printing |
| 5568 | a Perl C<IV> as a signed decimal integer. |
| 5569 | |
| 5570 | =item C<ivsize> |
| 5571 | |
| 5572 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 5573 | |
| 5574 | This variable is the size of an C<IV> in bytes. |
| 5575 | |
| 5576 | =item C<ivtype> |
| 5577 | |
| 5578 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 5579 | |
| 5580 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's C<IV>. |
| 5581 | |
| 5582 | =back |
| 5583 | |
| 5584 | =head2 k |
| 5585 | |
| 5586 | =over 4 |
| 5587 | |
| 5588 | =item C<known_extensions> |
| 5589 | |
| 5590 | From F<Extensions.U>: |
| 5591 | |
| 5592 | This variable holds a list of all C<XS> extensions included in |
| 5593 | the package. |
| 5594 | |
| 5595 | =item C<ksh> |
| 5596 | |
| 5597 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 5598 | |
| 5599 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 5600 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 5601 | |
| 5602 | =back |
| 5603 | |
| 5604 | =head2 l |
| 5605 | |
| 5606 | =over 4 |
| 5607 | |
| 5608 | =item C<ld> |
| 5609 | |
| 5610 | From F<dlsrc.U>: |
| 5611 | |
| 5612 | This variable indicates the program to be used to link |
| 5613 | libraries for dynamic loading. On some systems, it is C<ld>. |
| 5614 | On C<ELF> systems, it should be $cc. Mostly, we'll try to respect |
| 5615 | the hint file setting. |
| 5616 | |
| 5617 | =item C<lddlflags> |
| 5618 | |
| 5619 | From F<dlsrc.U>: |
| 5620 | |
| 5621 | This variable contains any special flags that might need to be |
| 5622 | passed to $ld to create a shared library suitable for dynamic |
| 5623 | loading. It is up to the makefile to use it. For hpux, it |
| 5624 | should be C<-b>. For sunos 4.1, it is empty. |
| 5625 | |
| 5626 | =item C<ldflags> |
| 5627 | |
| 5628 | From F<ccflags.U>: |
| 5629 | |
| 5630 | This variable contains any additional C loader flags desired by |
| 5631 | the user. It is up to the Makefile to use this. |
| 5632 | |
| 5633 | =item C<ldflags_uselargefiles> |
| 5634 | |
| 5635 | From F<uselfs.U>: |
| 5636 | |
| 5637 | This variable contains the loader flags needed by large file builds |
| 5638 | and added to ldflags by hints files. |
| 5639 | |
| 5640 | =item C<ldlibpthname> |
| 5641 | |
| 5642 | From F<libperl.U>: |
| 5643 | |
| 5644 | This variable holds the name of the shared library |
| 5645 | search path, often C<LD_LIBRARY_PATH>. To get an empty |
| 5646 | string, the hints file must set this to C<none>. |
| 5647 | |
| 5648 | =item C<less> |
| 5649 | |
| 5650 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 5651 | |
| 5652 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 5653 | full pathname (if any) of the less program. After Configure runs, |
| 5654 | the value is reset to a plain C<less> and is not useful. |
| 5655 | |
| 5656 | =item C<lib_ext> |
| 5657 | |
| 5658 | From F<Unix.U>: |
| 5659 | |
| 5660 | This is an old synonym for _a. |
| 5661 | |
| 5662 | =item C<libc> |
| 5663 | |
| 5664 | From F<libc.U>: |
| 5665 | |
| 5666 | This variable contains the location of the C library. |
| 5667 | |
| 5668 | =item C<libperl> |
| 5669 | |
| 5670 | From F<libperl.U>: |
| 5671 | |
| 5672 | The perl executable is obtained by linking F<perlmain.c> with |
| 5673 | libperl, any static extensions (usually just DynaLoader), |
| 5674 | and any other libraries needed on this system. libperl |
| 5675 | is usually F<libperl.a>, but can also be F<libperl.so.xxx> if |
| 5676 | the user wishes to build a perl executable with a shared |
| 5677 | library. |
| 5678 | |
| 5679 | =item C<libpth> |
| 5680 | |
| 5681 | From F<libpth.U>: |
| 5682 | |
| 5683 | This variable holds the general path (space-separated) used to find |
| 5684 | libraries. It is intended to be used by other units. |
| 5685 | |
| 5686 | =item C<libs> |
| 5687 | |
| 5688 | From F<libs.U>: |
| 5689 | |
| 5690 | This variable holds the additional libraries we want to use. |
| 5691 | It is up to the Makefile to deal with it. The list can be empty. |
| 5692 | |
| 5693 | =item C<libsdirs> |
| 5694 | |
| 5695 | From F<libs.U>: |
| 5696 | |
| 5697 | This variable holds the directory names aka dirnames of the libraries |
| 5698 | we found and accepted, duplicates are removed. |
| 5699 | |
| 5700 | =item C<libsfiles> |
| 5701 | |
| 5702 | From F<libs.U>: |
| 5703 | |
| 5704 | This variable holds the filenames aka basenames of the libraries |
| 5705 | we found and accepted. |
| 5706 | |
| 5707 | =item C<libsfound> |
| 5708 | |
| 5709 | From F<libs.U>: |
| 5710 | |
| 5711 | This variable holds the full pathnames of the libraries |
| 5712 | we found and accepted. |
| 5713 | |
| 5714 | =item C<libspath> |
| 5715 | |
| 5716 | From F<libs.U>: |
| 5717 | |
| 5718 | This variable holds the directory names probed for libraries. |
| 5719 | |
| 5720 | =item C<libswanted> |
| 5721 | |
| 5722 | From F<Myinit.U>: |
| 5723 | |
| 5724 | This variable holds a list of all the libraries we want to |
| 5725 | search. The order is chosen to pick up the c library |
| 5726 | ahead of ucb or bsd libraries for SVR4. |
| 5727 | |
| 5728 | =item C<libswanted_uselargefiles> |
| 5729 | |
| 5730 | From F<uselfs.U>: |
| 5731 | |
| 5732 | This variable contains the libraries needed by large file builds |
| 5733 | and added to ldflags by hints files. It is a space separated list |
| 5734 | of the library names without the C<lib> prefix or any suffix, just |
| 5735 | like F<libswanted.>. |
| 5736 | |
| 5737 | =item C<line> |
| 5738 | |
| 5739 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 5740 | |
| 5741 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 5742 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 5743 | |
| 5744 | =item C<lint> |
| 5745 | |
| 5746 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 5747 | |
| 5748 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 5749 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 5750 | |
| 5751 | =item C<lkflags> |
| 5752 | |
| 5753 | From F<ccflags.U>: |
| 5754 | |
| 5755 | This variable contains any additional C partial linker flags desired by |
| 5756 | the user. It is up to the Makefile to use this. |
| 5757 | |
| 5758 | =item C<ln> |
| 5759 | |
| 5760 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 5761 | |
| 5762 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 5763 | full pathname (if any) of the ln program. After Configure runs, |
| 5764 | the value is reset to a plain C<ln> and is not useful. |
| 5765 | |
| 5766 | =item C<lns> |
| 5767 | |
| 5768 | From F<lns.U>: |
| 5769 | |
| 5770 | This variable holds the name of the command to make |
| 5771 | symbolic links (if they are supported). It can be used |
| 5772 | in the Makefile. It is either C<ln -s> or C<ln> |
| 5773 | |
| 5774 | =item C<localtime_r_proto> |
| 5775 | |
| 5776 | From F<d_localtime_r.U>: |
| 5777 | |
| 5778 | This variable encodes the prototype of localtime_r. |
| 5779 | It is zero if d_localtime_r is undef, and one of the |
| 5780 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_localtime_r |
| 5781 | is defined. |
| 5782 | |
| 5783 | =item C<locincpth> |
| 5784 | |
| 5785 | From F<ccflags.U>: |
| 5786 | |
| 5787 | This variable contains a list of additional directories to be |
| 5788 | searched by the compiler. The appropriate C<-I> directives will |
| 5789 | be added to ccflags. This is intended to simplify setting |
| 5790 | local directories from the Configure command line. |
| 5791 | It's not much, but it parallels the loclibpth stuff in F<libpth.U>. |
| 5792 | |
| 5793 | =item C<loclibpth> |
| 5794 | |
| 5795 | From F<libpth.U>: |
| 5796 | |
| 5797 | This variable holds the paths (space-separated) used to find local |
| 5798 | libraries. It is prepended to libpth, and is intended to be easily |
| 5799 | set from the command line. |
| 5800 | |
| 5801 | =item C<longdblsize> |
| 5802 | |
| 5803 | From F<d_longdbl.U>: |
| 5804 | |
| 5805 | This variable contains the value of the C<LONG_DOUBLESIZE> symbol, which |
| 5806 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a long double, |
| 5807 | if this system supports long doubles. |
| 5808 | |
| 5809 | =item C<longlongsize> |
| 5810 | |
| 5811 | From F<d_longlong.U>: |
| 5812 | |
| 5813 | This variable contains the value of the C<LONGLONGSIZE> symbol, which |
| 5814 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a long long, |
| 5815 | if this system supports long long. |
| 5816 | |
| 5817 | =item C<longsize> |
| 5818 | |
| 5819 | From F<intsize.U>: |
| 5820 | |
| 5821 | This variable contains the value of the C<LONGSIZE> symbol, which |
| 5822 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a long. |
| 5823 | |
| 5824 | =item C<lp> |
| 5825 | |
| 5826 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 5827 | |
| 5828 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 5829 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 5830 | |
| 5831 | =item C<lpr> |
| 5832 | |
| 5833 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 5834 | |
| 5835 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 5836 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 5837 | |
| 5838 | =item C<ls> |
| 5839 | |
| 5840 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 5841 | |
| 5842 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 5843 | full pathname (if any) of the ls program. After Configure runs, |
| 5844 | the value is reset to a plain C<ls> and is not useful. |
| 5845 | |
| 5846 | =item C<lseeksize> |
| 5847 | |
| 5848 | From F<lseektype.U>: |
| 5849 | |
| 5850 | This variable defines lseektype to be something like off_t, long, |
| 5851 | or whatever type is used to declare lseek offset's type in the |
| 5852 | kernel (which also appears to be lseek's return type). |
| 5853 | |
| 5854 | =item C<lseektype> |
| 5855 | |
| 5856 | From F<lseektype.U>: |
| 5857 | |
| 5858 | This variable defines lseektype to be something like off_t, long, |
| 5859 | or whatever type is used to declare lseek offset's type in the |
| 5860 | kernel (which also appears to be lseek's return type). |
| 5861 | |
| 5862 | =back |
| 5863 | |
| 5864 | =head2 m |
| 5865 | |
| 5866 | =over 4 |
| 5867 | |
| 5868 | =item C<mail> |
| 5869 | |
| 5870 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 5871 | |
| 5872 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 5873 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 5874 | |
| 5875 | =item C<mailx> |
| 5876 | |
| 5877 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 5878 | |
| 5879 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 5880 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 5881 | |
| 5882 | =item C<make> |
| 5883 | |
| 5884 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 5885 | |
| 5886 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 5887 | full pathname (if any) of the make program. After Configure runs, |
| 5888 | the value is reset to a plain C<make> and is not useful. |
| 5889 | |
| 5890 | =item C<make_set_make> |
| 5891 | |
| 5892 | From F<make.U>: |
| 5893 | |
| 5894 | Some versions of C<make> set the variable C<MAKE>. Others do not. |
| 5895 | This variable contains the string to be included in F<Makefile.SH> |
| 5896 | so that C<MAKE> is set if needed, and not if not needed. |
| 5897 | Possible values are: |
| 5898 | |
| 5899 | make_set_make=C<#> # If your make program handles this for you, |
| 5900 | |
| 5901 | make_set_make=C<MAKE=$make> # if it doesn't. |
| 5902 | |
| 5903 | This uses a comment character to distinguish a |
| 5904 | C<set> value (from a previous F<config.sh> or Configure C<-D> option) |
| 5905 | from an uncomputed value. |
| 5906 | |
| 5907 | =item C<mallocobj> |
| 5908 | |
| 5909 | From F<mallocsrc.U>: |
| 5910 | |
| 5911 | This variable contains the name of the F<malloc.o> that this package |
| 5912 | generates, if that F<malloc.o> is preferred over the system malloc. |
| 5913 | Otherwise the value is null. This variable is intended for generating |
| 5914 | Makefiles. See mallocsrc. |
| 5915 | |
| 5916 | =item C<mallocsrc> |
| 5917 | |
| 5918 | From F<mallocsrc.U>: |
| 5919 | |
| 5920 | This variable contains the name of the F<malloc.c> that comes with |
| 5921 | the package, if that F<malloc.c> is preferred over the system malloc. |
| 5922 | Otherwise the value is null. This variable is intended for generating |
| 5923 | Makefiles. |
| 5924 | |
| 5925 | =item C<malloctype> |
| 5926 | |
| 5927 | From F<mallocsrc.U>: |
| 5928 | |
| 5929 | This variable contains the kind of ptr returned by malloc and realloc. |
| 5930 | |
| 5931 | =item C<man1dir> |
| 5932 | |
| 5933 | From F<man1dir.U>: |
| 5934 | |
| 5935 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which manual |
| 5936 | source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the |
| 5937 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command. |
| 5938 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself. |
| 5939 | |
| 5940 | =item C<man1direxp> |
| 5941 | |
| 5942 | From F<man1dir.U>: |
| 5943 | |
| 5944 | This variable is the same as the man1dir variable, but is filename |
| 5945 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. |
| 5946 | |
| 5947 | =item C<man1ext> |
| 5948 | |
| 5949 | From F<man1dir.U>: |
| 5950 | |
| 5951 | This variable contains the extension that the manual page should |
| 5952 | have: one of C<n>, C<l>, or C<1>. The Makefile must supply the F<.>. |
| 5953 | See man1dir. |
| 5954 | |
| 5955 | =item C<man3dir> |
| 5956 | |
| 5957 | From F<man3dir.U>: |
| 5958 | |
| 5959 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which manual |
| 5960 | source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the |
| 5961 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command. |
| 5962 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself. |
| 5963 | |
| 5964 | =item C<man3direxp> |
| 5965 | |
| 5966 | From F<man3dir.U>: |
| 5967 | |
| 5968 | This variable is the same as the man3dir variable, but is filename |
| 5969 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. |
| 5970 | |
| 5971 | =item C<man3ext> |
| 5972 | |
| 5973 | From F<man3dir.U>: |
| 5974 | |
| 5975 | This variable contains the extension that the manual page should |
| 5976 | have: one of C<n>, C<l>, or C<3>. The Makefile must supply the F<.>. |
| 5977 | See man3dir. |
| 5978 | |
| 5979 | =back |
| 5980 | |
| 5981 | =head2 M |
| 5982 | |
| 5983 | =over 4 |
| 5984 | |
| 5985 | =item C<Mcc> |
| 5986 | |
| 5987 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 5988 | |
| 5989 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 5990 | full pathname (if any) of the Mcc program. After Configure runs, |
| 5991 | the value is reset to a plain C<Mcc> and is not useful. |
| 5992 | |
| 5993 | =item C<mips_type> |
| 5994 | |
| 5995 | From F<usrinc.U>: |
| 5996 | |
| 5997 | This variable holds the environment type for the mips system. |
| 5998 | Possible values are "BSD 4.3" and "System V". |
| 5999 | |
| 6000 | =item C<mistrustnm> |
| 6001 | |
| 6002 | From F<Csym.U>: |
| 6003 | |
| 6004 | This variable can be used to establish a fallthrough for the cases |
| 6005 | where nm fails to find a symbol. If usenm is false or usenm is true |
| 6006 | and mistrustnm is false, this variable has no effect. If usenm is true |
| 6007 | and mistrustnm is C<compile>, a test program will be compiled to try to |
| 6008 | find any symbol that can't be located via nm lookup. If mistrustnm is |
| 6009 | C<run>, the test program will be run as well as being compiled. |
| 6010 | |
| 6011 | =item C<mkdir> |
| 6012 | |
| 6013 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 6014 | |
| 6015 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 6016 | full pathname (if any) of the mkdir program. After Configure runs, |
| 6017 | the value is reset to a plain C<mkdir> and is not useful. |
| 6018 | |
| 6019 | =item C<mmaptype> |
| 6020 | |
| 6021 | From F<d_mmap.U>: |
| 6022 | |
| 6023 | This symbol contains the type of pointer returned by mmap() |
| 6024 | (and simultaneously the type of the first argument). |
| 6025 | It can be C<void *> or C<caddr_t>. |
| 6026 | |
| 6027 | =item C<modetype> |
| 6028 | |
| 6029 | From F<modetype.U>: |
| 6030 | |
| 6031 | This variable defines modetype to be something like mode_t, |
| 6032 | int, unsigned short, or whatever type is used to declare file |
| 6033 | modes for system calls. |
| 6034 | |
| 6035 | =item C<more> |
| 6036 | |
| 6037 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 6038 | |
| 6039 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 6040 | full pathname (if any) of the more program. After Configure runs, |
| 6041 | the value is reset to a plain C<more> and is not useful. |
| 6042 | |
| 6043 | =item C<multiarch> |
| 6044 | |
| 6045 | From F<multiarch.U>: |
| 6046 | |
| 6047 | This variable conditionally defines the C<MULTIARCH> symbol |
| 6048 | which signifies the presence of multiplatform files. |
| 6049 | This is normally set by hints files. |
| 6050 | |
| 6051 | =item C<mv> |
| 6052 | |
| 6053 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 6054 | |
| 6055 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 6056 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 6057 | |
| 6058 | =item C<myarchname> |
| 6059 | |
| 6060 | From F<archname.U>: |
| 6061 | |
| 6062 | This variable holds the architecture name computed by Configure in |
| 6063 | a previous run. It is not intended to be perused by any user and |
| 6064 | should never be set in a hint file. |
| 6065 | |
| 6066 | =item C<mydomain> |
| 6067 | |
| 6068 | From F<myhostname.U>: |
| 6069 | |
| 6070 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<MYDOMAIN> symbol, |
| 6071 | which is the domain of the host the program is going to run on. |
| 6072 | The domain must be appended to myhostname to form a complete host name. |
| 6073 | The dot comes with mydomain, and need not be supplied by the program. |
| 6074 | |
| 6075 | =item C<myhostname> |
| 6076 | |
| 6077 | From F<myhostname.U>: |
| 6078 | |
| 6079 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<MYHOSTNAME> symbol, |
| 6080 | which is the name of the host the program is going to run on. |
| 6081 | The domain is not kept with hostname, but must be gotten from mydomain. |
| 6082 | The dot comes with mydomain, and need not be supplied by the program. |
| 6083 | |
| 6084 | =item C<myuname> |
| 6085 | |
| 6086 | From F<Oldconfig.U>: |
| 6087 | |
| 6088 | The output of C<uname -a> if available, otherwise the hostname. On Xenix, |
| 6089 | pseudo variables assignments in the output are stripped, thank you. The |
| 6090 | whole thing is then lower-cased. |
| 6091 | |
| 6092 | =back |
| 6093 | |
| 6094 | =head2 n |
| 6095 | |
| 6096 | =over 4 |
| 6097 | |
| 6098 | =item C<n> |
| 6099 | |
| 6100 | From F<n.U>: |
| 6101 | |
| 6102 | This variable contains the C<-n> flag if that is what causes the echo |
| 6103 | command to suppress newline. Otherwise it is null. Correct usage is |
| 6104 | $echo $n "prompt for a question: $c". |
| 6105 | |
| 6106 | =item C<need_va_copy> |
| 6107 | |
| 6108 | From F<need_va_copy.U>: |
| 6109 | |
| 6110 | This symbol, if defined, indicates that the system stores |
| 6111 | the variable argument list datatype, va_list, in a format |
| 6112 | that cannot be copied by simple assignment, so that some |
| 6113 | other means must be used when copying is required. |
| 6114 | As such systems vary in their provision (or non-provision) |
| 6115 | of copying mechanisms, F<handy.h> defines a platform- |
| 6116 | C<independent> macro, Perl_va_copy(src, dst), to do the job. |
| 6117 | |
| 6118 | =item C<netdb_hlen_type> |
| 6119 | |
| 6120 | From F<netdbtype.U>: |
| 6121 | |
| 6122 | This variable holds the type used for the 2nd argument to |
| 6123 | gethostbyaddr(). Usually, this is int or size_t or unsigned. |
| 6124 | This is only useful if you have gethostbyaddr(), naturally. |
| 6125 | |
| 6126 | =item C<netdb_host_type> |
| 6127 | |
| 6128 | From F<netdbtype.U>: |
| 6129 | |
| 6130 | This variable holds the type used for the 1st argument to |
| 6131 | gethostbyaddr(). Usually, this is char * or void *, possibly |
| 6132 | with or without a const prefix. |
| 6133 | This is only useful if you have gethostbyaddr(), naturally. |
| 6134 | |
| 6135 | =item C<netdb_name_type> |
| 6136 | |
| 6137 | From F<netdbtype.U>: |
| 6138 | |
| 6139 | This variable holds the type used for the argument to |
| 6140 | gethostbyname(). Usually, this is char * or const char *. |
| 6141 | This is only useful if you have gethostbyname(), naturally. |
| 6142 | |
| 6143 | =item C<netdb_net_type> |
| 6144 | |
| 6145 | From F<netdbtype.U>: |
| 6146 | |
| 6147 | This variable holds the type used for the 1st argument to |
| 6148 | getnetbyaddr(). Usually, this is int or long. |
| 6149 | This is only useful if you have getnetbyaddr(), naturally. |
| 6150 | |
| 6151 | =item C<nm> |
| 6152 | |
| 6153 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 6154 | |
| 6155 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 6156 | full pathname (if any) of the nm program. After Configure runs, |
| 6157 | the value is reset to a plain C<nm> and is not useful. |
| 6158 | |
| 6159 | =item C<nm_opt> |
| 6160 | |
| 6161 | From F<usenm.U>: |
| 6162 | |
| 6163 | This variable holds the options that may be necessary for nm. |
| 6164 | |
| 6165 | =item C<nm_so_opt> |
| 6166 | |
| 6167 | From F<usenm.U>: |
| 6168 | |
| 6169 | This variable holds the options that may be necessary for nm |
| 6170 | to work on a shared library but that can not be used on an |
| 6171 | archive library. Currently, this is only used by Linux, where |
| 6172 | nm --dynamic is *required* to get symbols from an C<ELF> library which |
| 6173 | has been stripped, but nm --dynamic is *fatal* on an archive library. |
| 6174 | Maybe Linux should just always set usenm=false. |
| 6175 | |
| 6176 | =item C<nonxs_ext> |
| 6177 | |
| 6178 | From F<Extensions.U>: |
| 6179 | |
| 6180 | This variable holds a list of all non-xs extensions included |
| 6181 | in the package. All of them will be built. |
| 6182 | |
| 6183 | =item C<nroff> |
| 6184 | |
| 6185 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 6186 | |
| 6187 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 6188 | full pathname (if any) of the nroff program. After Configure runs, |
| 6189 | the value is reset to a plain C<nroff> and is not useful. |
| 6190 | |
| 6191 | =item C<nv_preserves_uv_bits> |
| 6192 | |
| 6193 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 6194 | |
| 6195 | This variable indicates how many of bits type uvtype |
| 6196 | a variable nvtype can preserve. |
| 6197 | |
| 6198 | =item C<nveformat> |
| 6199 | |
| 6200 | From F<perlxvf.U>: |
| 6201 | |
| 6202 | This variable contains the format string used for printing |
| 6203 | a Perl C<NV> using %e-ish floating point format. |
| 6204 | |
| 6205 | =item C<nvEUformat> |
| 6206 | |
| 6207 | From F<perlxvf.U>: |
| 6208 | |
| 6209 | This variable contains the format string used for printing |
| 6210 | a Perl C<NV> using %E-ish floating point format. |
| 6211 | |
| 6212 | =item C<nvfformat> |
| 6213 | |
| 6214 | From F<perlxvf.U>: |
| 6215 | |
| 6216 | This variable confains the format string used for printing |
| 6217 | a Perl C<NV> using %f-ish floating point format. |
| 6218 | |
| 6219 | =item C<nvFUformat> |
| 6220 | |
| 6221 | From F<perlxvf.U>: |
| 6222 | |
| 6223 | This variable confains the format string used for printing |
| 6224 | a Perl C<NV> using %F-ish floating point format. |
| 6225 | |
| 6226 | =item C<nvgformat> |
| 6227 | |
| 6228 | From F<perlxvf.U>: |
| 6229 | |
| 6230 | This variable contains the format string used for printing |
| 6231 | a Perl C<NV> using %g-ish floating point format. |
| 6232 | |
| 6233 | =item C<nvGUformat> |
| 6234 | |
| 6235 | From F<perlxvf.U>: |
| 6236 | |
| 6237 | This variable contains the format string used for printing |
| 6238 | a Perl C<NV> using %G-ish floating point format. |
| 6239 | |
| 6240 | =item C<nvsize> |
| 6241 | |
| 6242 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 6243 | |
| 6244 | This variable is the size of an C<NV> in bytes. |
| 6245 | |
| 6246 | =item C<nvtype> |
| 6247 | |
| 6248 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 6249 | |
| 6250 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's C<NV>. |
| 6251 | |
| 6252 | =back |
| 6253 | |
| 6254 | =head2 o |
| 6255 | |
| 6256 | =over 4 |
| 6257 | |
| 6258 | =item C<o_nonblock> |
| 6259 | |
| 6260 | From F<nblock_io.U>: |
| 6261 | |
| 6262 | This variable bears the symbol value to be used during open() or fcntl() |
| 6263 | to turn on non-blocking I/O for a file descriptor. If you wish to switch |
| 6264 | between blocking and non-blocking, you may try ioctl(C<FIOSNBIO>) instead, |
| 6265 | but that is only supported by some devices. |
| 6266 | |
| 6267 | =item C<obj_ext> |
| 6268 | |
| 6269 | From F<Unix.U>: |
| 6270 | |
| 6271 | This is an old synonym for _o. |
| 6272 | |
| 6273 | =item C<old_pthread_create_joinable> |
| 6274 | |
| 6275 | From F<d_pthrattrj.U>: |
| 6276 | |
| 6277 | This variable defines the constant to use for creating joinable |
| 6278 | (aka undetached) pthreads. Unused if F<pthread.h> defines |
| 6279 | C<PTHREAD_CREATE_JOINABLE>. If used, possible values are |
| 6280 | C<PTHREAD_CREATE_UNDETACHED> and C<__UNDETACHED>. |
| 6281 | |
| 6282 | =item C<optimize> |
| 6283 | |
| 6284 | From F<ccflags.U>: |
| 6285 | |
| 6286 | This variable contains any F<optimizer/debugger> flag that should be used. |
| 6287 | It is up to the Makefile to use it. |
| 6288 | |
| 6289 | =item C<orderlib> |
| 6290 | |
| 6291 | From F<orderlib.U>: |
| 6292 | |
| 6293 | This variable is C<true> if the components of libraries must be ordered |
| 6294 | (with `lorder $* | tsort`) before placing them in an archive. Set to |
| 6295 | C<false> if ranlib or ar can generate random libraries. |
| 6296 | |
| 6297 | =item C<osname> |
| 6298 | |
| 6299 | From F<Oldconfig.U>: |
| 6300 | |
| 6301 | This variable contains the operating system name (e.g. sunos, |
| 6302 | solaris, hpux, etc.). It can be useful later on for setting |
| 6303 | defaults. Any spaces are replaced with underscores. It is set |
| 6304 | to a null string if we can't figure it out. |
| 6305 | |
| 6306 | =item C<osvers> |
| 6307 | |
| 6308 | From F<Oldconfig.U>: |
| 6309 | |
| 6310 | This variable contains the operating system version (e.g. |
| 6311 | 4.1.3, 5.2, etc.). It is primarily used for helping select |
| 6312 | an appropriate hints file, but might be useful elsewhere for |
| 6313 | setting defaults. It is set to '' if we can't figure it out. |
| 6314 | We try to be flexible about how much of the version number |
| 6315 | to keep, e.g. if 4.1.1, 4.1.2, and 4.1.3 are essentially the |
| 6316 | same for this package, hints files might just be F<os_4.0> or |
| 6317 | F<os_4.1>, etc., not keeping separate files for each little release. |
| 6318 | |
| 6319 | =item C<otherlibdirs> |
| 6320 | |
| 6321 | From F<otherlibdirs.U>: |
| 6322 | |
| 6323 | This variable contains a colon-separated set of paths for the perl |
| 6324 | binary to search for additional library files or modules. |
| 6325 | These directories will be tacked to the end of @C<INC>. |
| 6326 | Perl will automatically search below each path for version- |
| 6327 | and architecture-specific directories. See inc_version_list |
| 6328 | for more details. |
| 6329 | A value of C< > means C<none> and is used to preserve this value |
| 6330 | for the next run through Configure. |
| 6331 | |
| 6332 | =back |
| 6333 | |
| 6334 | =head2 p |
| 6335 | |
| 6336 | =over 4 |
| 6337 | |
| 6338 | =item C<package> |
| 6339 | |
| 6340 | From F<package.U>: |
| 6341 | |
| 6342 | This variable contains the name of the package being constructed. |
| 6343 | It is primarily intended for the use of later Configure units. |
| 6344 | |
| 6345 | =item C<pager> |
| 6346 | |
| 6347 | From F<pager.U>: |
| 6348 | |
| 6349 | This variable contains the name of the preferred pager on the system. |
| 6350 | Usual values are (the full pathnames of) more, less, pg, or cat. |
| 6351 | |
| 6352 | =item C<passcat> |
| 6353 | |
| 6354 | From F<nis.U>: |
| 6355 | |
| 6356 | This variable contains a command that produces the text of the |
| 6357 | F</etc/passwd> file. This is normally "cat F</etc/passwd>", but can be |
| 6358 | "ypcat passwd" when C<NIS> is used. |
| 6359 | On some systems, such as os390, there may be no equivalent |
| 6360 | command, in which case this variable is unset. |
| 6361 | |
| 6362 | =item C<patchlevel> |
| 6363 | |
| 6364 | From F<patchlevel.U>: |
| 6365 | |
| 6366 | The patchlevel level of this package. |
| 6367 | The value of patchlevel comes from the F<patchlevel.h> file. |
| 6368 | In a version number such as 5.6.1, this is the C<6>. |
| 6369 | In F<patchlevel.h>, this is referred to as C<PERL_VERSION>. |
| 6370 | |
| 6371 | =item C<path_sep> |
| 6372 | |
| 6373 | From F<Unix.U>: |
| 6374 | |
| 6375 | This is an old synonym for p_ in F<Head.U>, the character |
| 6376 | used to separate elements in the command shell search C<PATH>. |
| 6377 | |
| 6378 | =item C<perl5> |
| 6379 | |
| 6380 | From F<perl5.U>: |
| 6381 | |
| 6382 | This variable contains the full path (if any) to a previously |
| 6383 | installed F<perl5.005> or later suitable for running the script |
| 6384 | to determine inc_version_list. |
| 6385 | |
| 6386 | =item C<perl> |
| 6387 | |
| 6388 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 6389 | |
| 6390 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 6391 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 6392 | |
| 6393 | =item C<perl_patchlevel> |
| 6394 | |
| 6395 | From F<patchlevel.U>: |
| 6396 | |
| 6397 | This is the Perl patch level, a numeric change identifier, |
| 6398 | as defined by whichever source code maintenance system |
| 6399 | is used to maintain the patches; currently Perforce. |
| 6400 | It does not correlate with the Perl version numbers or |
| 6401 | the maintenance versus development dichotomy except |
| 6402 | by also being increasing. |
| 6403 | |
| 6404 | =back |
| 6405 | |
| 6406 | =head2 P |
| 6407 | |
| 6408 | =over 4 |
| 6409 | |
| 6410 | =item C<PERL_REVISION> |
| 6411 | |
| 6412 | From F<Oldsyms.U>: |
| 6413 | |
| 6414 | In a Perl version number such as 5.6.2, this is the 5. |
| 6415 | This value is manually set in F<patchlevel.h> |
| 6416 | |
| 6417 | =item C<PERL_SUBVERSION> |
| 6418 | |
| 6419 | From F<Oldsyms.U>: |
| 6420 | |
| 6421 | In a Perl version number such as 5.6.2, this is the 2. |
| 6422 | Values greater than 50 represent potentially unstable |
| 6423 | development subversions. |
| 6424 | This value is manually set in F<patchlevel.h> |
| 6425 | |
| 6426 | =item C<PERL_VERSION> |
| 6427 | |
| 6428 | From F<Oldsyms.U>: |
| 6429 | |
| 6430 | In a Perl version number such as 5.6.2, this is the 6. |
| 6431 | This value is manually set in F<patchlevel.h> |
| 6432 | |
| 6433 | =item C<perladmin> |
| 6434 | |
| 6435 | From F<perladmin.U>: |
| 6436 | |
| 6437 | Electronic mail address of the perl5 administrator. |
| 6438 | |
| 6439 | =item C<perllibs> |
| 6440 | |
| 6441 | From F<End.U>: |
| 6442 | |
| 6443 | The list of libraries needed by Perl only (any libraries needed |
| 6444 | by extensions only will by dropped, if using dynamic loading). |
| 6445 | |
| 6446 | =item C<perlpath> |
| 6447 | |
| 6448 | From F<perlpath.U>: |
| 6449 | |
| 6450 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<PERLPATH> symbol, |
| 6451 | which contains the name of the perl interpreter to be used in |
| 6452 | shell scripts and in the "eval C<exec>" idiom. This variable is |
| 6453 | not necessarily the pathname of the file containing the perl |
| 6454 | interpreter; you must append the executable extension (_exe) if |
| 6455 | it is not already present. Note that Perl code that runs during |
| 6456 | the Perl build process cannot reference this variable, as Perl |
| 6457 | may not have been installed, or even if installed, may be a |
| 6458 | different version of Perl. |
| 6459 | |
| 6460 | =item C<pg> |
| 6461 | |
| 6462 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 6463 | |
| 6464 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 6465 | full pathname (if any) of the pg program. After Configure runs, |
| 6466 | the value is reset to a plain C<pg> and is not useful. |
| 6467 | |
| 6468 | =item C<phostname> |
| 6469 | |
| 6470 | From F<myhostname.U>: |
| 6471 | |
| 6472 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<PHOSTNAME> symbol, |
| 6473 | which is a command that can be fed to popen() to get the host name. |
| 6474 | The program should probably not presume that the domain is or isn't |
| 6475 | there already. |
| 6476 | |
| 6477 | =item C<pidtype> |
| 6478 | |
| 6479 | From F<pidtype.U>: |
| 6480 | |
| 6481 | This variable defines C<PIDTYPE> to be something like pid_t, int, |
| 6482 | ushort, or whatever type is used to declare process ids in the kernel. |
| 6483 | |
| 6484 | =item C<plibpth> |
| 6485 | |
| 6486 | From F<libpth.U>: |
| 6487 | |
| 6488 | Holds the private path used by Configure to find out the libraries. |
| 6489 | Its value is prepend to libpth. This variable takes care of special |
| 6490 | machines, like the mips. Usually, it should be empty. |
| 6491 | |
| 6492 | =item C<pmake> |
| 6493 | |
| 6494 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 6495 | |
| 6496 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 6497 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 6498 | |
| 6499 | =item C<pr> |
| 6500 | |
| 6501 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 6502 | |
| 6503 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 6504 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 6505 | |
| 6506 | =item C<prefix> |
| 6507 | |
| 6508 | From F<prefix.U>: |
| 6509 | |
| 6510 | This variable holds the name of the directory below which the |
| 6511 | user will install the package. Usually, this is F</usr/local>, and |
| 6512 | executables go in F</usr/local/bin>, library stuff in F</usr/local/lib>, |
| 6513 | man pages in F</usr/local/man>, etc. It is only used to set defaults |
| 6514 | for things in F<bin.U>, F<mansrc.U>, F<privlib.U>, or F<scriptdir.U>. |
| 6515 | |
| 6516 | =item C<prefixexp> |
| 6517 | |
| 6518 | From F<prefix.U>: |
| 6519 | |
| 6520 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below |
| 6521 | which the user will install the package. Derived from prefix. |
| 6522 | |
| 6523 | =item C<privlib> |
| 6524 | |
| 6525 | From F<privlib.U>: |
| 6526 | |
| 6527 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<PRIVLIB> symbol, |
| 6528 | which is the name of the private library for this package. It may |
| 6529 | have a F<~> on the front. It is up to the makefile to eventually create |
| 6530 | this directory while performing installation (with F<~> substitution). |
| 6531 | |
| 6532 | =item C<privlibexp> |
| 6533 | |
| 6534 | From F<privlib.U>: |
| 6535 | |
| 6536 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of privlib, so that you |
| 6537 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. |
| 6538 | |
| 6539 | =item C<procselfexe> |
| 6540 | |
| 6541 | From F<d_procselfexe.U>: |
| 6542 | |
| 6543 | If d_procselfexe is defined, $procselfexe is the filename |
| 6544 | of the symbolic link pointing to the absolute pathname of |
| 6545 | the executing program. |
| 6546 | |
| 6547 | =item C<prototype> |
| 6548 | |
| 6549 | From F<prototype.U>: |
| 6550 | |
| 6551 | This variable holds the eventual value of C<CAN_PROTOTYPE>, which |
| 6552 | indicates the C compiler can handle funciton prototypes. |
| 6553 | |
| 6554 | =item C<ptrsize> |
| 6555 | |
| 6556 | From F<ptrsize.U>: |
| 6557 | |
| 6558 | This variable contains the value of the C<PTRSIZE> symbol, which |
| 6559 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a pointer. |
| 6560 | |
| 6561 | =back |
| 6562 | |
| 6563 | =head2 q |
| 6564 | |
| 6565 | =over 4 |
| 6566 | |
| 6567 | =item C<quadkind> |
| 6568 | |
| 6569 | From F<quadtype.U>: |
| 6570 | |
| 6571 | This variable, if defined, encodes the type of a quad: |
| 6572 | 1 = int, 2 = long, 3 = long long, 4 = int64_t. |
| 6573 | |
| 6574 | =item C<quadtype> |
| 6575 | |
| 6576 | From F<quadtype.U>: |
| 6577 | |
| 6578 | This variable defines Quad_t to be something like long, int, |
| 6579 | long long, int64_t, or whatever type is used for 64-bit integers. |
| 6580 | |
| 6581 | =back |
| 6582 | |
| 6583 | =head2 r |
| 6584 | |
| 6585 | =over 4 |
| 6586 | |
| 6587 | =item C<randbits> |
| 6588 | |
| 6589 | From F<randfunc.U>: |
| 6590 | |
| 6591 | Indicates how many bits are produced by the function used to |
| 6592 | generate normalized random numbers. |
| 6593 | |
| 6594 | =item C<randfunc> |
| 6595 | |
| 6596 | From F<randfunc.U>: |
| 6597 | |
| 6598 | Indicates the name of the random number function to use. |
| 6599 | Values include drand48, random, and rand. In C programs, |
| 6600 | the C<Drand01> macro is defined to generate uniformly distributed |
| 6601 | random numbers over the range [0., 1.[ (see drand01 and nrand). |
| 6602 | |
| 6603 | =item C<random_r_proto> |
| 6604 | |
| 6605 | From F<d_random_r.U>: |
| 6606 | |
| 6607 | This variable encodes the prototype of random_r. |
| 6608 | It is zero if d_random_r is undef, and one of the |
| 6609 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_random_r |
| 6610 | is defined. |
| 6611 | |
| 6612 | =item C<randseedtype> |
| 6613 | |
| 6614 | From F<randfunc.U>: |
| 6615 | |
| 6616 | Indicates the type of the argument of the seedfunc. |
| 6617 | |
| 6618 | =item C<ranlib> |
| 6619 | |
| 6620 | From F<orderlib.U>: |
| 6621 | |
| 6622 | This variable is set to the pathname of the ranlib program, if it is |
| 6623 | needed to generate random libraries. Set to C<:> if ar can generate |
| 6624 | random libraries or if random libraries are not supported |
| 6625 | |
| 6626 | =item C<rd_nodata> |
| 6627 | |
| 6628 | From F<nblock_io.U>: |
| 6629 | |
| 6630 | This variable holds the return code from read() when no data is |
| 6631 | present. It should be -1, but some systems return 0 when C<O_NDELAY> is |
| 6632 | used, which is a shame because you cannot make the difference between |
| 6633 | no data and an F<EOF.>. Sigh! |
| 6634 | |
| 6635 | =item C<readdir64_r_proto> |
| 6636 | |
| 6637 | From F<d_readdir64_r.U>: |
| 6638 | |
| 6639 | This variable encodes the prototype of readdir64_r. |
| 6640 | It is zero if d_readdir64_r is undef, and one of the |
| 6641 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_readdir64_r |
| 6642 | is defined. |
| 6643 | |
| 6644 | =item C<readdir_r_proto> |
| 6645 | |
| 6646 | From F<d_readdir_r.U>: |
| 6647 | |
| 6648 | This variable encodes the prototype of readdir_r. |
| 6649 | It is zero if d_readdir_r is undef, and one of the |
| 6650 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_readdir_r |
| 6651 | is defined. |
| 6652 | |
| 6653 | =item C<revision> |
| 6654 | |
| 6655 | From F<patchlevel.U>: |
| 6656 | |
| 6657 | The value of revision comes from the F<patchlevel.h> file. |
| 6658 | In a version number such as 5.6.1, this is the C<5>. |
| 6659 | In F<patchlevel.h>, this is referred to as C<PERL_REVISION>. |
| 6660 | |
| 6661 | =item C<rm> |
| 6662 | |
| 6663 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 6664 | |
| 6665 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 6666 | full pathname (if any) of the rm program. After Configure runs, |
| 6667 | the value is reset to a plain C<rm> and is not useful. |
| 6668 | |
| 6669 | =item C<rmail> |
| 6670 | |
| 6671 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 6672 | |
| 6673 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 6674 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 6675 | |
| 6676 | =item C<run> |
| 6677 | |
| 6678 | From F<Cross.U>: |
| 6679 | |
| 6680 | This variable contains the command used by Configure |
| 6681 | to copy and execute a cross-compiled executable in the |
| 6682 | target host. Useful and available only during Perl build. |
| 6683 | Empty string '' if not cross-compiling. |
| 6684 | |
| 6685 | =item C<runnm> |
| 6686 | |
| 6687 | From F<usenm.U>: |
| 6688 | |
| 6689 | This variable contains C<true> or C<false> depending whether the |
| 6690 | nm extraction should be performed or not, according to the value |
| 6691 | of usenm and the flags on the Configure command line. |
| 6692 | |
| 6693 | =back |
| 6694 | |
| 6695 | =head2 s |
| 6696 | |
| 6697 | =over 4 |
| 6698 | |
| 6699 | =item C<sched_yield> |
| 6700 | |
| 6701 | From F<d_pthread_y.U>: |
| 6702 | |
| 6703 | This variable defines the way to yield the execution |
| 6704 | of the current thread. |
| 6705 | |
| 6706 | =item C<scriptdir> |
| 6707 | |
| 6708 | From F<scriptdir.U>: |
| 6709 | |
| 6710 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants |
| 6711 | to put publicly scripts for the package in question. It is either |
| 6712 | the same directory as for binaries, or a special one that can be |
| 6713 | mounted across different architectures, like F</usr/share>. Programs |
| 6714 | must be prepared to deal with F<~name> expansion. |
| 6715 | |
| 6716 | =item C<scriptdirexp> |
| 6717 | |
| 6718 | From F<scriptdir.U>: |
| 6719 | |
| 6720 | This variable is the same as scriptdir, but is filename expanded |
| 6721 | at configuration time, for programs not wanting to bother with it. |
| 6722 | |
| 6723 | =item C<sed> |
| 6724 | |
| 6725 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 6726 | |
| 6727 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 6728 | full pathname (if any) of the sed program. After Configure runs, |
| 6729 | the value is reset to a plain C<sed> and is not useful. |
| 6730 | |
| 6731 | =item C<seedfunc> |
| 6732 | |
| 6733 | From F<randfunc.U>: |
| 6734 | |
| 6735 | Indicates the random number generating seed function. |
| 6736 | Values include srand48, srandom, and srand. |
| 6737 | |
| 6738 | =item C<selectminbits> |
| 6739 | |
| 6740 | From F<selectminbits.U>: |
| 6741 | |
| 6742 | This variable holds the minimum number of bits operated by select. |
| 6743 | That is, if you do select(n, ...), how many bits at least will be |
| 6744 | cleared in the masks if some activity is detected. Usually this |
| 6745 | is either n or 32*ceil(F<n/32>), especially many little-endians do |
| 6746 | the latter. This is only useful if you have select(), naturally. |
| 6747 | |
| 6748 | =item C<selecttype> |
| 6749 | |
| 6750 | From F<selecttype.U>: |
| 6751 | |
| 6752 | This variable holds the type used for the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th |
| 6753 | arguments to select. Usually, this is C<fd_set *>, if C<HAS_FD_SET> |
| 6754 | is defined, and C<int *> otherwise. This is only useful if you |
| 6755 | have select(), naturally. |
| 6756 | |
| 6757 | =item C<sendmail> |
| 6758 | |
| 6759 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 6760 | |
| 6761 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 6762 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 6763 | |
| 6764 | =item C<setgrent_r_proto> |
| 6765 | |
| 6766 | From F<d_setgrent_r.U>: |
| 6767 | |
| 6768 | This variable encodes the prototype of setgrent_r. |
| 6769 | It is zero if d_setgrent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 6770 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setgrent_r |
| 6771 | is defined. |
| 6772 | |
| 6773 | =item C<sethostent_r_proto> |
| 6774 | |
| 6775 | From F<d_sethostent_r.U>: |
| 6776 | |
| 6777 | This variable encodes the prototype of sethostent_r. |
| 6778 | It is zero if d_sethostent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 6779 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_sethostent_r |
| 6780 | is defined. |
| 6781 | |
| 6782 | =item C<setlocale_r_proto> |
| 6783 | |
| 6784 | From F<d_setlocale_r.U>: |
| 6785 | |
| 6786 | This variable encodes the prototype of setlocale_r. |
| 6787 | It is zero if d_setlocale_r is undef, and one of the |
| 6788 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setlocale_r |
| 6789 | is defined. |
| 6790 | |
| 6791 | =item C<setnetent_r_proto> |
| 6792 | |
| 6793 | From F<d_setnetent_r.U>: |
| 6794 | |
| 6795 | This variable encodes the prototype of setnetent_r. |
| 6796 | It is zero if d_setnetent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 6797 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setnetent_r |
| 6798 | is defined. |
| 6799 | |
| 6800 | =item C<setprotoent_r_proto> |
| 6801 | |
| 6802 | From F<d_setprotoent_r.U>: |
| 6803 | |
| 6804 | This variable encodes the prototype of setprotoent_r. |
| 6805 | It is zero if d_setprotoent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 6806 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setprotoent_r |
| 6807 | is defined. |
| 6808 | |
| 6809 | =item C<setpwent_r_proto> |
| 6810 | |
| 6811 | From F<d_setpwent_r.U>: |
| 6812 | |
| 6813 | This variable encodes the prototype of setpwent_r. |
| 6814 | It is zero if d_setpwent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 6815 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setpwent_r |
| 6816 | is defined. |
| 6817 | |
| 6818 | =item C<setservent_r_proto> |
| 6819 | |
| 6820 | From F<d_setservent_r.U>: |
| 6821 | |
| 6822 | This variable encodes the prototype of setservent_r. |
| 6823 | It is zero if d_setservent_r is undef, and one of the |
| 6824 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_setservent_r |
| 6825 | is defined. |
| 6826 | |
| 6827 | =item C<sh> |
| 6828 | |
| 6829 | From F<sh.U>: |
| 6830 | |
| 6831 | This variable contains the full pathname of the shell used |
| 6832 | on this system to execute Bourne shell scripts. Usually, this will be |
| 6833 | F</bin/sh>, though it's possible that some systems will have F</bin/ksh>, |
| 6834 | F</bin/pdksh>, F</bin/ash>, F</bin/bash>, or even something such as |
| 6835 | D:F</bin/sh.exe>. |
| 6836 | This unit comes before F<Options.U>, so you can't set sh with a C<-D> |
| 6837 | option, though you can override this (and startsh) |
| 6838 | with C<-O -Dsh=F</bin/whatever> -Dstartsh=whatever> |
| 6839 | |
| 6840 | =item C<shar> |
| 6841 | |
| 6842 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 6843 | |
| 6844 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 6845 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 6846 | |
| 6847 | =item C<sharpbang> |
| 6848 | |
| 6849 | From F<spitshell.U>: |
| 6850 | |
| 6851 | This variable contains the string #! if this system supports that |
| 6852 | construct. |
| 6853 | |
| 6854 | =item C<shmattype> |
| 6855 | |
| 6856 | From F<d_shmat.U>: |
| 6857 | |
| 6858 | This symbol contains the type of pointer returned by shmat(). |
| 6859 | It can be C<void *> or C<char *>. |
| 6860 | |
| 6861 | =item C<shortsize> |
| 6862 | |
| 6863 | From F<intsize.U>: |
| 6864 | |
| 6865 | This variable contains the value of the C<SHORTSIZE> symbol which |
| 6866 | indicates to the C program how many bytes there are in a short. |
| 6867 | |
| 6868 | =item C<shrpenv> |
| 6869 | |
| 6870 | From F<libperl.U>: |
| 6871 | |
| 6872 | If the user builds a shared F<libperl.so>, then we need to tell the |
| 6873 | C<perl> executable where it will be able to find the installed F<libperl.so>. |
| 6874 | One way to do this on some systems is to set the environment variable |
| 6875 | C<LD_RUN_PATH> to the directory that will be the final location of the |
| 6876 | shared F<libperl.so>. The makefile can use this with something like |
| 6877 | $shrpenv $(C<CC>) -o perl F<perlmain.o> $libperl $libs |
| 6878 | Typical values are |
| 6879 | shrpenv="env C<LD_RUN_PATH>=F<$archlibexp/C<CORE>>" |
| 6880 | or |
| 6881 | shrpenv='' |
| 6882 | See the main perl F<Makefile.SH> for actual working usage. |
| 6883 | Alternatively, we might be able to use a command line option such |
| 6884 | as -R F<$archlibexp/C<CORE>> (Solaris) or -Wl,-rpath |
| 6885 | F<$archlibexp/C<CORE>> (Linux). |
| 6886 | |
| 6887 | =item C<shsharp> |
| 6888 | |
| 6889 | From F<spitshell.U>: |
| 6890 | |
| 6891 | This variable tells further Configure units whether your sh can |
| 6892 | handle # comments. |
| 6893 | |
| 6894 | =item C<sig_count> |
| 6895 | |
| 6896 | From F<sig_name.U>: |
| 6897 | |
| 6898 | This variable holds a number larger than the largest valid |
| 6899 | signal number. This is usually the same as the C<NSIG> macro. |
| 6900 | |
| 6901 | =item C<sig_name> |
| 6902 | |
| 6903 | From F<sig_name.U>: |
| 6904 | |
| 6905 | This variable holds the signal names, space separated. The leading |
| 6906 | C<SIG> in signal name is removed. A C<ZERO> is prepended to the list. |
| 6907 | This is currently not used, sig_name_init is used instead. |
| 6908 | |
| 6909 | =item C<sig_name_init> |
| 6910 | |
| 6911 | From F<sig_name.U>: |
| 6912 | |
| 6913 | This variable holds the signal names, enclosed in double quotes and |
| 6914 | separated by commas, suitable for use in the C<SIG_NAME> definition |
| 6915 | below. A C<ZERO> is prepended to the list, and the list is |
| 6916 | terminated with a plain 0. The leading C<SIG> in signal names |
| 6917 | is removed. See sig_num. |
| 6918 | |
| 6919 | =item C<sig_num> |
| 6920 | |
| 6921 | From F<sig_name.U>: |
| 6922 | |
| 6923 | This variable holds the signal numbers, space separated. A C<ZERO> is |
| 6924 | prepended to the list (corresponding to the fake C<SIGZERO>). |
| 6925 | Those numbers correspond to the value of the signal listed |
| 6926 | in the same place within the sig_name list. |
| 6927 | This is currently not used, sig_num_init is used instead. |
| 6928 | |
| 6929 | =item C<sig_num_init> |
| 6930 | |
| 6931 | From F<sig_name.U>: |
| 6932 | |
| 6933 | This variable holds the signal numbers, enclosed in double quotes and |
| 6934 | separated by commas, suitable for use in the C<SIG_NUM> definition |
| 6935 | below. A C<ZERO> is prepended to the list, and the list is |
| 6936 | terminated with a plain 0. |
| 6937 | |
| 6938 | =item C<sig_size> |
| 6939 | |
| 6940 | From F<sig_name.U>: |
| 6941 | |
| 6942 | This variable contains the number of elements of the sig_name |
| 6943 | and sig_num arrays. |
| 6944 | |
| 6945 | =item C<signal_t> |
| 6946 | |
| 6947 | From F<d_voidsig.U>: |
| 6948 | |
| 6949 | This variable holds the type of the signal handler (void or int). |
| 6950 | |
| 6951 | =item C<sitearch> |
| 6952 | |
| 6953 | From F<sitearch.U>: |
| 6954 | |
| 6955 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<SITEARCH> symbol, |
| 6956 | which is the name of the private library for this package. It may |
| 6957 | have a F<~> on the front. It is up to the makefile to eventually create |
| 6958 | this directory while performing installation (with F<~> substitution). |
| 6959 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 6960 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local |
| 6961 | architecture-dependent modules in this directory with |
| 6962 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> |
| 6963 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 6964 | |
| 6965 | =item C<sitearchexp> |
| 6966 | |
| 6967 | From F<sitearch.U>: |
| 6968 | |
| 6969 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of sitearch, so that you |
| 6970 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. |
| 6971 | |
| 6972 | =item C<sitebin> |
| 6973 | |
| 6974 | From F<sitebin.U>: |
| 6975 | |
| 6976 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants |
| 6977 | to put add-on publicly executable files for the package in question. It |
| 6978 | is most often a local directory such as F</usr/local/bin>. Programs using |
| 6979 | this variable must be prepared to deal with F<~name> substitution. |
| 6980 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 6981 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local |
| 6982 | executables in this directory with |
| 6983 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> |
| 6984 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 6985 | |
| 6986 | =item C<sitebinexp> |
| 6987 | |
| 6988 | From F<sitebin.U>: |
| 6989 | |
| 6990 | This is the same as the sitebin variable, but is filename expanded at |
| 6991 | configuration time, for use in your makefiles. |
| 6992 | |
| 6993 | =item C<sitehtml1dir> |
| 6994 | |
| 6995 | From F<sitehtml1dir.U>: |
| 6996 | |
| 6997 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which site-specific |
| 6998 | html source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the |
| 6999 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command. |
| 7000 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself. |
| 7001 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 7002 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local |
| 7003 | html pages in this directory with |
| 7004 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> |
| 7005 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 7006 | |
| 7007 | =item C<sitehtml1direxp> |
| 7008 | |
| 7009 | From F<sitehtml1dir.U>: |
| 7010 | |
| 7011 | This variable is the same as the sitehtml1dir variable, but is filename |
| 7012 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. |
| 7013 | |
| 7014 | =item C<sitehtml3dir> |
| 7015 | |
| 7016 | From F<sitehtml3dir.U>: |
| 7017 | |
| 7018 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which site-specific |
| 7019 | library html source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the |
| 7020 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command. |
| 7021 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself. |
| 7022 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 7023 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local |
| 7024 | library html pages in this directory with |
| 7025 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> |
| 7026 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 7027 | |
| 7028 | =item C<sitehtml3direxp> |
| 7029 | |
| 7030 | From F<sitehtml3dir.U>: |
| 7031 | |
| 7032 | This variable is the same as the sitehtml3dir variable, but is filename |
| 7033 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. |
| 7034 | |
| 7035 | =item C<sitelib> |
| 7036 | |
| 7037 | From F<sitelib.U>: |
| 7038 | |
| 7039 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<SITELIB> symbol, |
| 7040 | which is the name of the private library for this package. It may |
| 7041 | have a F<~> on the front. It is up to the makefile to eventually create |
| 7042 | this directory while performing installation (with F<~> substitution). |
| 7043 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 7044 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local |
| 7045 | architecture-independent modules in this directory with |
| 7046 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> |
| 7047 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 7048 | |
| 7049 | =item C<sitelib_stem> |
| 7050 | |
| 7051 | From F<sitelib.U>: |
| 7052 | |
| 7053 | This variable is $sitelibexp with any trailing version-specific component |
| 7054 | removed. The elements in inc_version_list (F<inc_version_list.U>) can |
| 7055 | be tacked onto this variable to generate a list of directories to search. |
| 7056 | |
| 7057 | =item C<sitelibexp> |
| 7058 | |
| 7059 | From F<sitelib.U>: |
| 7060 | |
| 7061 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of sitelib, so that you |
| 7062 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. |
| 7063 | |
| 7064 | =item C<siteman1dir> |
| 7065 | |
| 7066 | From F<siteman1dir.U>: |
| 7067 | |
| 7068 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which site-specific |
| 7069 | manual source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the |
| 7070 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command. |
| 7071 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself. |
| 7072 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 7073 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local |
| 7074 | man1 pages in this directory with |
| 7075 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> |
| 7076 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 7077 | |
| 7078 | =item C<siteman1direxp> |
| 7079 | |
| 7080 | From F<siteman1dir.U>: |
| 7081 | |
| 7082 | This variable is the same as the siteman1dir variable, but is filename |
| 7083 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. |
| 7084 | |
| 7085 | =item C<siteman3dir> |
| 7086 | |
| 7087 | From F<siteman3dir.U>: |
| 7088 | |
| 7089 | This variable contains the name of the directory in which site-specific |
| 7090 | library man source pages are to be put. It is the responsibility of the |
| 7091 | F<Makefile.SH> to get the value of this into the proper command. |
| 7092 | You must be prepared to do the F<~name> expansion yourself. |
| 7093 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 7094 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local |
| 7095 | man3 pages in this directory with |
| 7096 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> |
| 7097 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 7098 | |
| 7099 | =item C<siteman3direxp> |
| 7100 | |
| 7101 | From F<siteman3dir.U>: |
| 7102 | |
| 7103 | This variable is the same as the siteman3dir variable, but is filename |
| 7104 | expanded at configuration time, for convenient use in makefiles. |
| 7105 | |
| 7106 | =item C<siteprefix> |
| 7107 | |
| 7108 | From F<siteprefix.U>: |
| 7109 | |
| 7110 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below |
| 7111 | which the user will install add-on packages. |
| 7112 | See C<INSTALL> for usage and examples. |
| 7113 | |
| 7114 | =item C<siteprefixexp> |
| 7115 | |
| 7116 | From F<siteprefix.U>: |
| 7117 | |
| 7118 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below |
| 7119 | which the user will install add-on packages. Derived from siteprefix. |
| 7120 | |
| 7121 | =item C<sitescript> |
| 7122 | |
| 7123 | From F<sitescript.U>: |
| 7124 | |
| 7125 | This variable holds the name of the directory in which the user wants |
| 7126 | to put add-on publicly executable files for the package in question. It |
| 7127 | is most often a local directory such as F</usr/local/bin>. Programs using |
| 7128 | this variable must be prepared to deal with F<~name> substitution. |
| 7129 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 7130 | After perl has been installed, users may install their own local |
| 7131 | scripts in this directory with |
| 7132 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> |
| 7133 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 7134 | |
| 7135 | =item C<sitescriptexp> |
| 7136 | |
| 7137 | From F<sitescript.U>: |
| 7138 | |
| 7139 | This is the same as the sitescript variable, but is filename expanded at |
| 7140 | configuration time, for use in your makefiles. |
| 7141 | |
| 7142 | =item C<sizesize> |
| 7143 | |
| 7144 | From F<sizesize.U>: |
| 7145 | |
| 7146 | This variable contains the size of a sizetype in bytes. |
| 7147 | |
| 7148 | =item C<sizetype> |
| 7149 | |
| 7150 | From F<sizetype.U>: |
| 7151 | |
| 7152 | This variable defines sizetype to be something like size_t, |
| 7153 | unsigned long, or whatever type is used to declare length |
| 7154 | parameters for string functions. |
| 7155 | |
| 7156 | =item C<sleep> |
| 7157 | |
| 7158 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7159 | |
| 7160 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 7161 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 7162 | |
| 7163 | =item C<smail> |
| 7164 | |
| 7165 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7166 | |
| 7167 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 7168 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 7169 | |
| 7170 | =item C<so> |
| 7171 | |
| 7172 | From F<so.U>: |
| 7173 | |
| 7174 | This variable holds the extension used to identify shared libraries |
| 7175 | (also known as shared objects) on the system. Usually set to C<so>. |
| 7176 | |
| 7177 | =item C<sockethdr> |
| 7178 | |
| 7179 | From F<d_socket.U>: |
| 7180 | |
| 7181 | This variable has any cpp C<-I> flags needed for socket support. |
| 7182 | |
| 7183 | =item C<socketlib> |
| 7184 | |
| 7185 | From F<d_socket.U>: |
| 7186 | |
| 7187 | This variable has the names of any libraries needed for socket support. |
| 7188 | |
| 7189 | =item C<socksizetype> |
| 7190 | |
| 7191 | From F<socksizetype.U>: |
| 7192 | |
| 7193 | This variable holds the type used for the size argument |
| 7194 | for various socket calls like accept. Usual values include |
| 7195 | socklen_t, size_t, and int. |
| 7196 | |
| 7197 | =item C<sort> |
| 7198 | |
| 7199 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7200 | |
| 7201 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 7202 | full pathname (if any) of the sort program. After Configure runs, |
| 7203 | the value is reset to a plain C<sort> and is not useful. |
| 7204 | |
| 7205 | =item C<spackage> |
| 7206 | |
| 7207 | From F<package.U>: |
| 7208 | |
| 7209 | This variable contains the name of the package being constructed, |
| 7210 | with the first letter uppercased, F<i.e>. suitable for starting |
| 7211 | sentences. |
| 7212 | |
| 7213 | =item C<spitshell> |
| 7214 | |
| 7215 | From F<spitshell.U>: |
| 7216 | |
| 7217 | This variable contains the command necessary to spit out a runnable |
| 7218 | shell on this system. It is either cat or a grep C<-v> for # comments. |
| 7219 | |
| 7220 | =item C<sPRId64> |
| 7221 | |
| 7222 | From F<quadfio.U>: |
| 7223 | |
| 7224 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to |
| 7225 | format 64-bit decimal numbers (format C<d>) for output. |
| 7226 | |
| 7227 | =item C<sPRIeldbl> |
| 7228 | |
| 7229 | From F<longdblfio.U>: |
| 7230 | |
| 7231 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to |
| 7232 | format long doubles (format C<e>) for output. |
| 7233 | |
| 7234 | =item C<sPRIEUldbl> |
| 7235 | |
| 7236 | From F<longdblfio.U>: |
| 7237 | |
| 7238 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to |
| 7239 | format long doubles (format C<E>) for output. |
| 7240 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from sPRIeldbl so that even |
| 7241 | case-blind systems can see the difference. |
| 7242 | |
| 7243 | =item C<sPRIfldbl> |
| 7244 | |
| 7245 | From F<longdblfio.U>: |
| 7246 | |
| 7247 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to |
| 7248 | format long doubles (format C<f>) for output. |
| 7249 | |
| 7250 | =item C<sPRIFUldbl> |
| 7251 | |
| 7252 | From F<longdblfio.U>: |
| 7253 | |
| 7254 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to |
| 7255 | format long doubles (format C<F>) for output. |
| 7256 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from sPRIfldbl so that even |
| 7257 | case-blind systems can see the difference. |
| 7258 | |
| 7259 | =item C<sPRIgldbl> |
| 7260 | |
| 7261 | From F<longdblfio.U>: |
| 7262 | |
| 7263 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to |
| 7264 | format long doubles (format C<g>) for output. |
| 7265 | |
| 7266 | =item C<sPRIGUldbl> |
| 7267 | |
| 7268 | From F<longdblfio.U>: |
| 7269 | |
| 7270 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to |
| 7271 | format long doubles (format C<G>) for output. |
| 7272 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from sPRIgldbl so that even |
| 7273 | case-blind systems can see the difference. |
| 7274 | |
| 7275 | =item C<sPRIi64> |
| 7276 | |
| 7277 | From F<quadfio.U>: |
| 7278 | |
| 7279 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to |
| 7280 | format 64-bit decimal numbers (format C<i>) for output. |
| 7281 | |
| 7282 | =item C<sPRIo64> |
| 7283 | |
| 7284 | From F<quadfio.U>: |
| 7285 | |
| 7286 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to |
| 7287 | format 64-bit octal numbers (format C<o>) for output. |
| 7288 | |
| 7289 | =item C<sPRIu64> |
| 7290 | |
| 7291 | From F<quadfio.U>: |
| 7292 | |
| 7293 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to |
| 7294 | format 64-bit unsigned decimal numbers (format C<u>) for output. |
| 7295 | |
| 7296 | =item C<sPRIx64> |
| 7297 | |
| 7298 | From F<quadfio.U>: |
| 7299 | |
| 7300 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to |
| 7301 | format 64-bit hexadecimal numbers (format C<x>) for output. |
| 7302 | |
| 7303 | =item C<sPRIXU64> |
| 7304 | |
| 7305 | From F<quadfio.U>: |
| 7306 | |
| 7307 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to |
| 7308 | format 64-bit hExADECimAl numbers (format C<X>) for output. |
| 7309 | The C<U> in the name is to separate this from sPRIx64 so that even |
| 7310 | case-blind systems can see the difference. |
| 7311 | |
| 7312 | =item C<srand48_r_proto> |
| 7313 | |
| 7314 | From F<d_srand48_r.U>: |
| 7315 | |
| 7316 | This variable encodes the prototype of srand48_r. |
| 7317 | It is zero if d_srand48_r is undef, and one of the |
| 7318 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_srand48_r |
| 7319 | is defined. |
| 7320 | |
| 7321 | =item C<srandom_r_proto> |
| 7322 | |
| 7323 | From F<d_srandom_r.U>: |
| 7324 | |
| 7325 | This variable encodes the prototype of srandom_r. |
| 7326 | It is zero if d_srandom_r is undef, and one of the |
| 7327 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_srandom_r |
| 7328 | is defined. |
| 7329 | |
| 7330 | =item C<src> |
| 7331 | |
| 7332 | From F<src.U>: |
| 7333 | |
| 7334 | This variable holds the path to the package source. It is up to |
| 7335 | the Makefile to use this variable and set C<VPATH> accordingly to |
| 7336 | find the sources remotely. |
| 7337 | |
| 7338 | =item C<sSCNfldbl> |
| 7339 | |
| 7340 | From F<longdblfio.U>: |
| 7341 | |
| 7342 | This variable, if defined, contains the string used by stdio to |
| 7343 | format long doubles (format C<f>) for input. |
| 7344 | |
| 7345 | =item C<ssizetype> |
| 7346 | |
| 7347 | From F<ssizetype.U>: |
| 7348 | |
| 7349 | This variable defines ssizetype to be something like ssize_t, |
| 7350 | long or int. It is used by functions that return a count |
| 7351 | of bytes or an error condition. It must be a signed type. |
| 7352 | We will pick a type such that sizeof(SSize_t) == sizeof(Size_t). |
| 7353 | |
| 7354 | =item C<startperl> |
| 7355 | |
| 7356 | From F<startperl.U>: |
| 7357 | |
| 7358 | This variable contains the string to put on the front of a perl |
| 7359 | script to make sure (hopefully) that it runs with perl and not some |
| 7360 | shell. Of course, that leading line must be followed by the classical |
| 7361 | perl idiom: |
| 7362 | eval 'exec perl -S $0 ${1+C<$@>}' |
| 7363 | if $running_under_some_shell; |
| 7364 | to guarantee perl startup should the shell execute the script. Note |
| 7365 | that this magic incatation is not understood by csh. |
| 7366 | |
| 7367 | =item C<startsh> |
| 7368 | |
| 7369 | From F<startsh.U>: |
| 7370 | |
| 7371 | This variable contains the string to put on the front of a shell |
| 7372 | script to make sure (hopefully) that it runs with sh and not some |
| 7373 | other shell. |
| 7374 | |
| 7375 | =item C<static_ext> |
| 7376 | |
| 7377 | From F<Extensions.U>: |
| 7378 | |
| 7379 | This variable holds a list of C<XS> extension files we want to |
| 7380 | link statically into the package. It is used by Makefile. |
| 7381 | |
| 7382 | =item C<stdchar> |
| 7383 | |
| 7384 | From F<stdchar.U>: |
| 7385 | |
| 7386 | This variable conditionally defines C<STDCHAR> to be the type of char |
| 7387 | used in F<stdio.h>. It has the values "unsigned char" or C<char>. |
| 7388 | |
| 7389 | =item C<stdio_base> |
| 7390 | |
| 7391 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: |
| 7392 | |
| 7393 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to access the |
| 7394 | _base field (or equivalent) of F<stdio.h>'s C<FILE> structure. This will |
| 7395 | be used to define the macro FILE_base(fp). |
| 7396 | |
| 7397 | =item C<stdio_bufsiz> |
| 7398 | |
| 7399 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: |
| 7400 | |
| 7401 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to determine |
| 7402 | the number of bytes store in the I/O buffer pointer to by the |
| 7403 | _base field (or equivalent) of F<stdio.h>'s C<FILE> structure. This will |
| 7404 | be used to define the macro FILE_bufsiz(fp). |
| 7405 | |
| 7406 | =item C<stdio_cnt> |
| 7407 | |
| 7408 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: |
| 7409 | |
| 7410 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to access the |
| 7411 | _cnt field (or equivalent) of F<stdio.h>'s C<FILE> structure. This will |
| 7412 | be used to define the macro FILE_cnt(fp). |
| 7413 | |
| 7414 | =item C<stdio_filbuf> |
| 7415 | |
| 7416 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: |
| 7417 | |
| 7418 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to tell |
| 7419 | stdio to refill its internal buffers (?). This will |
| 7420 | be used to define the macro FILE_filbuf(fp). |
| 7421 | |
| 7422 | =item C<stdio_ptr> |
| 7423 | |
| 7424 | From F<d_stdstdio.U>: |
| 7425 | |
| 7426 | This variable defines how, given a C<FILE> pointer, fp, to access the |
| 7427 | _ptr field (or equivalent) of F<stdio.h>'s C<FILE> structure. This will |
| 7428 | be used to define the macro FILE_ptr(fp). |
| 7429 | |
| 7430 | =item C<stdio_stream_array> |
| 7431 | |
| 7432 | From F<stdio_streams.U>: |
| 7433 | |
| 7434 | This variable tells the name of the array holding the stdio streams. |
| 7435 | Usual values include _iob, __iob, and __sF. |
| 7436 | |
| 7437 | =item C<strerror_r_proto> |
| 7438 | |
| 7439 | From F<d_strerror_r.U>: |
| 7440 | |
| 7441 | This variable encodes the prototype of strerror_r. |
| 7442 | It is zero if d_strerror_r is undef, and one of the |
| 7443 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_strerror_r |
| 7444 | is defined. |
| 7445 | |
| 7446 | =item C<strings> |
| 7447 | |
| 7448 | From F<i_string.U>: |
| 7449 | |
| 7450 | This variable holds the full path of the string header that will be |
| 7451 | used. Typically F</usr/include/string.h> or F</usr/include/strings.h>. |
| 7452 | |
| 7453 | =item C<submit> |
| 7454 | |
| 7455 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7456 | |
| 7457 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 7458 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 7459 | |
| 7460 | =item C<subversion> |
| 7461 | |
| 7462 | From F<patchlevel.U>: |
| 7463 | |
| 7464 | The subversion level of this package. |
| 7465 | The value of subversion comes from the F<patchlevel.h> file. |
| 7466 | In a version number such as 5.6.1, this is the C<1>. |
| 7467 | In F<patchlevel.h>, this is referred to as C<PERL_SUBVERSION>. |
| 7468 | This is unique to perl. |
| 7469 | |
| 7470 | =item C<sysman> |
| 7471 | |
| 7472 | From F<sysman.U>: |
| 7473 | |
| 7474 | This variable holds the place where the manual is located on this |
| 7475 | system. It is not the place where the user wants to put his manual |
| 7476 | pages. Rather it is the place where Configure may look to find manual |
| 7477 | for unix commands (section 1 of the manual usually). See mansrc. |
| 7478 | |
| 7479 | =back |
| 7480 | |
| 7481 | =head2 t |
| 7482 | |
| 7483 | =over 4 |
| 7484 | |
| 7485 | =item C<tail> |
| 7486 | |
| 7487 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7488 | |
| 7489 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 7490 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 7491 | |
| 7492 | =item C<tar> |
| 7493 | |
| 7494 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7495 | |
| 7496 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 7497 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 7498 | |
| 7499 | =item C<targetarch> |
| 7500 | |
| 7501 | From F<Cross.U>: |
| 7502 | |
| 7503 | If cross-compiling, this variable contains the target architecture. |
| 7504 | If not, this will be empty. |
| 7505 | |
| 7506 | =item C<tbl> |
| 7507 | |
| 7508 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7509 | |
| 7510 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 7511 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 7512 | |
| 7513 | =item C<tee> |
| 7514 | |
| 7515 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7516 | |
| 7517 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 7518 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 7519 | |
| 7520 | =item C<test> |
| 7521 | |
| 7522 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7523 | |
| 7524 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 7525 | full pathname (if any) of the test program. After Configure runs, |
| 7526 | the value is reset to a plain C<test> and is not useful. |
| 7527 | |
| 7528 | =item C<timeincl> |
| 7529 | |
| 7530 | From F<i_time.U>: |
| 7531 | |
| 7532 | This variable holds the full path of the included time header(s). |
| 7533 | |
| 7534 | =item C<timetype> |
| 7535 | |
| 7536 | From F<d_time.U>: |
| 7537 | |
| 7538 | This variable holds the type returned by time(). It can be long, |
| 7539 | or time_t on C<BSD> sites (in which case <sys/types.h> should be |
| 7540 | included). Anyway, the type Time_t should be used. |
| 7541 | |
| 7542 | =item C<tmpnam_r_proto> |
| 7543 | |
| 7544 | From F<d_tmpnam_r.U>: |
| 7545 | |
| 7546 | This variable encodes the prototype of tmpnam_r. |
| 7547 | It is zero if d_tmpnam_r is undef, and one of the |
| 7548 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_tmpnam_r |
| 7549 | is defined. |
| 7550 | |
| 7551 | =item C<to> |
| 7552 | |
| 7553 | From F<Cross.U>: |
| 7554 | |
| 7555 | This variable contains the command used by Configure |
| 7556 | to copy to from the target host. Useful and available |
| 7557 | only during Perl build. |
| 7558 | The string C<:> if not cross-compiling. |
| 7559 | |
| 7560 | =item C<touch> |
| 7561 | |
| 7562 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7563 | |
| 7564 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 7565 | full pathname (if any) of the touch program. After Configure runs, |
| 7566 | the value is reset to a plain C<touch> and is not useful. |
| 7567 | |
| 7568 | =item C<tr> |
| 7569 | |
| 7570 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7571 | |
| 7572 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 7573 | full pathname (if any) of the tr program. After Configure runs, |
| 7574 | the value is reset to a plain C<tr> and is not useful. |
| 7575 | |
| 7576 | =item C<trnl> |
| 7577 | |
| 7578 | From F<trnl.U>: |
| 7579 | |
| 7580 | This variable contains the value to be passed to the tr(1) |
| 7581 | command to transliterate a newline. Typical values are |
| 7582 | C<\012> and C<\n>. This is needed for C<EBCDIC> systems where |
| 7583 | newline is not necessarily C<\012>. |
| 7584 | |
| 7585 | =item C<troff> |
| 7586 | |
| 7587 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7588 | |
| 7589 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 7590 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 7591 | |
| 7592 | =item C<ttyname_r_proto> |
| 7593 | |
| 7594 | From F<d_ttyname_r.U>: |
| 7595 | |
| 7596 | This variable encodes the prototype of ttyname_r. |
| 7597 | It is zero if d_ttyname_r is undef, and one of the |
| 7598 | C<REENTRANT_PROTO_T_ABC> macros of F<reentr.h> if d_ttyname_r |
| 7599 | is defined. |
| 7600 | |
| 7601 | =back |
| 7602 | |
| 7603 | =head2 u |
| 7604 | |
| 7605 | =over 4 |
| 7606 | |
| 7607 | =item C<u16size> |
| 7608 | |
| 7609 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 7610 | |
| 7611 | This variable is the size of an U16 in bytes. |
| 7612 | |
| 7613 | =item C<u16type> |
| 7614 | |
| 7615 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 7616 | |
| 7617 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's U16. |
| 7618 | |
| 7619 | =item C<u32size> |
| 7620 | |
| 7621 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 7622 | |
| 7623 | This variable is the size of an U32 in bytes. |
| 7624 | |
| 7625 | =item C<u32type> |
| 7626 | |
| 7627 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 7628 | |
| 7629 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's U32. |
| 7630 | |
| 7631 | =item C<u64size> |
| 7632 | |
| 7633 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 7634 | |
| 7635 | This variable is the size of an U64 in bytes. |
| 7636 | |
| 7637 | =item C<u64type> |
| 7638 | |
| 7639 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 7640 | |
| 7641 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's U64. |
| 7642 | |
| 7643 | =item C<u8size> |
| 7644 | |
| 7645 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 7646 | |
| 7647 | This variable is the size of an U8 in bytes. |
| 7648 | |
| 7649 | =item C<u8type> |
| 7650 | |
| 7651 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 7652 | |
| 7653 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's U8. |
| 7654 | |
| 7655 | =item C<uidformat> |
| 7656 | |
| 7657 | From F<uidf.U>: |
| 7658 | |
| 7659 | This variable contains the format string used for printing a Uid_t. |
| 7660 | |
| 7661 | =item C<uidsign> |
| 7662 | |
| 7663 | From F<uidsign.U>: |
| 7664 | |
| 7665 | This variable contains the signedness of a uidtype. |
| 7666 | 1 for unsigned, -1 for signed. |
| 7667 | |
| 7668 | =item C<uidsize> |
| 7669 | |
| 7670 | From F<uidsize.U>: |
| 7671 | |
| 7672 | This variable contains the size of a uidtype in bytes. |
| 7673 | |
| 7674 | =item C<uidtype> |
| 7675 | |
| 7676 | From F<uidtype.U>: |
| 7677 | |
| 7678 | This variable defines Uid_t to be something like uid_t, int, |
| 7679 | ushort, or whatever type is used to declare user ids in the kernel. |
| 7680 | |
| 7681 | =item C<uname> |
| 7682 | |
| 7683 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7684 | |
| 7685 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 7686 | full pathname (if any) of the uname program. After Configure runs, |
| 7687 | the value is reset to a plain C<uname> and is not useful. |
| 7688 | |
| 7689 | =item C<uniq> |
| 7690 | |
| 7691 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7692 | |
| 7693 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 7694 | full pathname (if any) of the uniq program. After Configure runs, |
| 7695 | the value is reset to a plain C<uniq> and is not useful. |
| 7696 | |
| 7697 | =item C<uquadtype> |
| 7698 | |
| 7699 | From F<quadtype.U>: |
| 7700 | |
| 7701 | This variable defines Uquad_t to be something like unsigned long, |
| 7702 | unsigned int, unsigned long long, uint64_t, or whatever type is |
| 7703 | used for 64-bit integers. |
| 7704 | |
| 7705 | =item C<use5005threads> |
| 7706 | |
| 7707 | From F<usethreads.U>: |
| 7708 | |
| 7709 | This variable conditionally defines the USE_5005THREADS symbol, |
| 7710 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use the 5.005-based |
| 7711 | threading implementation. |
| 7712 | |
| 7713 | =item C<use64bitall> |
| 7714 | |
| 7715 | From F<use64bits.U>: |
| 7716 | |
| 7717 | This variable conditionally defines the USE_64_BIT_ALL symbol, |
| 7718 | and indicates that 64-bit integer types should be used |
| 7719 | when available. The maximal possible |
| 7720 | 64-bitness is employed: LP64 or ILP64, meaning that you will |
| 7721 | be able to use more than 2 gigabytes of memory. This mode is |
| 7722 | even more binary incompatible than USE_64_BIT_INT. You may not |
| 7723 | be able to run the resulting executable in a 32-bit C<CPU> at all or |
| 7724 | you may need at least to reboot your C<OS> to 64-bit mode. |
| 7725 | |
| 7726 | =item C<use64bitint> |
| 7727 | |
| 7728 | From F<use64bits.U>: |
| 7729 | |
| 7730 | This variable conditionally defines the USE_64_BIT_INT symbol, |
| 7731 | and indicates that 64-bit integer types should be used |
| 7732 | when available. The minimal possible 64-bitness |
| 7733 | is employed, just enough to get 64-bit integers into Perl. |
| 7734 | This may mean using for example "long longs", while your memory |
| 7735 | may still be limited to 2 gigabytes. |
| 7736 | |
| 7737 | =item C<usecrosscompile> |
| 7738 | |
| 7739 | From F<Cross.U>: |
| 7740 | |
| 7741 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_CROSS_COMPILE> symbol, |
| 7742 | and indicates that Perl has been cross-compiled. |
| 7743 | |
| 7744 | =item C<usedl> |
| 7745 | |
| 7746 | From F<dlsrc.U>: |
| 7747 | |
| 7748 | This variable indicates if the system supports dynamic |
| 7749 | loading of some sort. See also dlsrc and dlobj. |
| 7750 | |
| 7751 | =item C<usefaststdio> |
| 7752 | |
| 7753 | From F<usefaststdio.U>: |
| 7754 | |
| 7755 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_FAST_STDIO> symbol, |
| 7756 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use C<fast stdio>. |
| 7757 | Defaults to define in Perls 5.8 and earlier, to undef later. |
| 7758 | |
| 7759 | =item C<useithreads> |
| 7760 | |
| 7761 | From F<usethreads.U>: |
| 7762 | |
| 7763 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_ITHREADS> symbol, |
| 7764 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use the interpreter-based |
| 7765 | threading implementation. |
| 7766 | |
| 7767 | =item C<uselargefiles> |
| 7768 | |
| 7769 | From F<uselfs.U>: |
| 7770 | |
| 7771 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_LARGE_FILES> symbol, |
| 7772 | and indicates that large file interfaces should be used when |
| 7773 | available. |
| 7774 | |
| 7775 | =item C<uselongdouble> |
| 7776 | |
| 7777 | From F<uselongdbl.U>: |
| 7778 | |
| 7779 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_LONG_DOUBLE> symbol, |
| 7780 | and indicates that long doubles should be used when available. |
| 7781 | |
| 7782 | =item C<usemallocwrap> |
| 7783 | |
| 7784 | From F<mallocsrc.U>: |
| 7785 | |
| 7786 | This variable contains y if we are wrapping malloc to prevent |
| 7787 | integer overflow during size calculations. |
| 7788 | |
| 7789 | =item C<usemorebits> |
| 7790 | |
| 7791 | From F<usemorebits.U>: |
| 7792 | |
| 7793 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_MORE_BITS> symbol, |
| 7794 | and indicates that explicit 64-bit interfaces and long doubles |
| 7795 | should be used when available. |
| 7796 | |
| 7797 | =item C<usemultiplicity> |
| 7798 | |
| 7799 | From F<usemultiplicity.U>: |
| 7800 | |
| 7801 | This variable conditionally defines the C<MULTIPLICITY> symbol, |
| 7802 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use multiplicity. |
| 7803 | |
| 7804 | =item C<usemymalloc> |
| 7805 | |
| 7806 | From F<mallocsrc.U>: |
| 7807 | |
| 7808 | This variable contains y if the malloc that comes with this package |
| 7809 | is desired over the system's version of malloc. People often include |
| 7810 | special versions of malloc for effiency, but such versions are often |
| 7811 | less portable. See also mallocsrc and mallocobj. |
| 7812 | If this is C<y>, then -lmalloc is removed from $libs. |
| 7813 | |
| 7814 | =item C<usenm> |
| 7815 | |
| 7816 | From F<usenm.U>: |
| 7817 | |
| 7818 | This variable contains C<true> or C<false> depending whether the |
| 7819 | nm extraction is wanted or not. |
| 7820 | |
| 7821 | =item C<useopcode> |
| 7822 | |
| 7823 | From F<Extensions.U>: |
| 7824 | |
| 7825 | This variable holds either C<true> or C<false> to indicate |
| 7826 | whether the Opcode extension should be used. The sole |
| 7827 | use for this currently is to allow an easy mechanism |
| 7828 | for users to skip the Opcode extension from the Configure |
| 7829 | command line. |
| 7830 | |
| 7831 | =item C<useperlio> |
| 7832 | |
| 7833 | From F<useperlio.U>: |
| 7834 | |
| 7835 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_PERLIO> symbol, |
| 7836 | and indicates that the PerlIO abstraction should be |
| 7837 | used throughout. |
| 7838 | |
| 7839 | =item C<useposix> |
| 7840 | |
| 7841 | From F<Extensions.U>: |
| 7842 | |
| 7843 | This variable holds either C<true> or C<false> to indicate |
| 7844 | whether the C<POSIX> extension should be used. The sole |
| 7845 | use for this currently is to allow an easy mechanism |
| 7846 | for hints files to indicate that C<POSIX> will not compile |
| 7847 | on a particular system. |
| 7848 | |
| 7849 | =item C<usereentrant> |
| 7850 | |
| 7851 | From F<usethreads.U>: |
| 7852 | |
| 7853 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_REENTRANT_API> symbol, |
| 7854 | which indicates that the thread code may try to use the various |
| 7855 | _r versions of library functions. This is only potentially |
| 7856 | meaningful if usethreads is set and is very experimental, it is |
| 7857 | not even prompted for. |
| 7858 | |
| 7859 | =item C<usesfio> |
| 7860 | |
| 7861 | From F<d_sfio.U>: |
| 7862 | |
| 7863 | This variable is set to true when the user agrees to use sfio. |
| 7864 | It is set to false when sfio is not available or when the user |
| 7865 | explicitely requests not to use sfio. It is here primarily so |
| 7866 | that command-line settings can override the auto-detection of |
| 7867 | d_sfio without running into a "WHOA THERE". |
| 7868 | |
| 7869 | =item C<useshrplib> |
| 7870 | |
| 7871 | From F<libperl.U>: |
| 7872 | |
| 7873 | This variable is set to C<true> if the user wishes |
| 7874 | to build a shared libperl, and C<false> otherwise. |
| 7875 | |
| 7876 | =item C<usesocks> |
| 7877 | |
| 7878 | From F<usesocks.U>: |
| 7879 | |
| 7880 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_SOCKS> symbol, |
| 7881 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use C<SOCKS>. |
| 7882 | |
| 7883 | =item C<usethreads> |
| 7884 | |
| 7885 | From F<usethreads.U>: |
| 7886 | |
| 7887 | This variable conditionally defines the C<USE_THREADS> symbol, |
| 7888 | and indicates that Perl should be built to use threads. |
| 7889 | |
| 7890 | =item C<usevendorprefix> |
| 7891 | |
| 7892 | From F<vendorprefix.U>: |
| 7893 | |
| 7894 | This variable tells whether the vendorprefix |
| 7895 | and consequently other vendor* paths are in use. |
| 7896 | |
| 7897 | =item C<usevfork> |
| 7898 | |
| 7899 | From F<d_vfork.U>: |
| 7900 | |
| 7901 | This variable is set to true when the user accepts to use vfork. |
| 7902 | It is set to false when no vfork is available or when the user |
| 7903 | explicitely requests not to use vfork. |
| 7904 | |
| 7905 | =item C<usrinc> |
| 7906 | |
| 7907 | From F<usrinc.U>: |
| 7908 | |
| 7909 | This variable holds the path of the include files, which is |
| 7910 | usually F</usr/include>. It is mainly used by other Configure units. |
| 7911 | |
| 7912 | =item C<uuname> |
| 7913 | |
| 7914 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 7915 | |
| 7916 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 7917 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 7918 | |
| 7919 | =item C<uvoformat> |
| 7920 | |
| 7921 | From F<perlxvf.U>: |
| 7922 | |
| 7923 | This variable contains the format string used for printing |
| 7924 | a Perl C<UV> as an unsigned octal integer. |
| 7925 | |
| 7926 | =item C<uvsize> |
| 7927 | |
| 7928 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 7929 | |
| 7930 | This variable is the size of a C<UV> in bytes. |
| 7931 | |
| 7932 | =item C<uvtype> |
| 7933 | |
| 7934 | From F<perlxv.U>: |
| 7935 | |
| 7936 | This variable contains the C type used for Perl's C<UV>. |
| 7937 | |
| 7938 | =item C<uvuformat> |
| 7939 | |
| 7940 | From F<perlxvf.U>: |
| 7941 | |
| 7942 | This variable contains the format string used for printing |
| 7943 | a Perl C<UV> as an unsigned decimal integer. |
| 7944 | |
| 7945 | =item C<uvxformat> |
| 7946 | |
| 7947 | From F<perlxvf.U>: |
| 7948 | |
| 7949 | This variable contains the format string used for printing |
| 7950 | a Perl C<UV> as an unsigned hexadecimal integer in lowercase abcdef. |
| 7951 | |
| 7952 | =item C<uvXUformat> |
| 7953 | |
| 7954 | From F<perlxvf.U>: |
| 7955 | |
| 7956 | This variable contains the format string used for printing |
| 7957 | a Perl C<UV> as an unsigned hexadecimal integer in uppercase C<ABCDEF>. |
| 7958 | |
| 7959 | =back |
| 7960 | |
| 7961 | =head2 v |
| 7962 | |
| 7963 | =over 4 |
| 7964 | |
| 7965 | =item C<vendorarch> |
| 7966 | |
| 7967 | From F<vendorarch.U>: |
| 7968 | |
| 7969 | This variable contains the value of the C<PERL_VENDORARCH> symbol. |
| 7970 | It may have a F<~> on the front. |
| 7971 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 7972 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own |
| 7973 | architecture-dependent modules and extensions in this directory with |
| 7974 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor |
| 7975 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 7976 | |
| 7977 | =item C<vendorarchexp> |
| 7978 | |
| 7979 | From F<vendorarch.U>: |
| 7980 | |
| 7981 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorarch, so that you |
| 7982 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. |
| 7983 | |
| 7984 | =item C<vendorbin> |
| 7985 | |
| 7986 | From F<vendorbin.U>: |
| 7987 | |
| 7988 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<VENDORBIN> symbol. |
| 7989 | It may have a F<~> on the front. |
| 7990 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 7991 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place additional |
| 7992 | binaries in this directory with |
| 7993 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor |
| 7994 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 7995 | |
| 7996 | =item C<vendorbinexp> |
| 7997 | |
| 7998 | From F<vendorbin.U>: |
| 7999 | |
| 8000 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorbin, so that you |
| 8001 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. |
| 8002 | |
| 8003 | =item C<vendorhtml1dir> |
| 8004 | |
| 8005 | From F<vendorhtml1dir.U>: |
| 8006 | |
| 8007 | This variable contains the name of the directory for html |
| 8008 | pages. It may have a F<~> on the front. |
| 8009 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 8010 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own |
| 8011 | html pages in this directory with |
| 8012 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor |
| 8013 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 8014 | |
| 8015 | =item C<vendorhtml1direxp> |
| 8016 | |
| 8017 | From F<vendorhtml1dir.U>: |
| 8018 | |
| 8019 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorhtml1dir, so that you |
| 8020 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. |
| 8021 | |
| 8022 | =item C<vendorhtml3dir> |
| 8023 | |
| 8024 | From F<vendorhtml3dir.U>: |
| 8025 | |
| 8026 | This variable contains the name of the directory for html |
| 8027 | library pages. It may have a F<~> on the front. |
| 8028 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 8029 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own |
| 8030 | html pages for modules and extensions in this directory with |
| 8031 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor |
| 8032 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 8033 | |
| 8034 | =item C<vendorhtml3direxp> |
| 8035 | |
| 8036 | From F<vendorhtml3dir.U>: |
| 8037 | |
| 8038 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorhtml3dir, so that you |
| 8039 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. |
| 8040 | |
| 8041 | =item C<vendorlib> |
| 8042 | |
| 8043 | From F<vendorlib.U>: |
| 8044 | |
| 8045 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<VENDORLIB> symbol, |
| 8046 | which is the name of the private library for this package. |
| 8047 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 8048 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own |
| 8049 | modules in this directory with |
| 8050 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor |
| 8051 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 8052 | |
| 8053 | =item C<vendorlib_stem> |
| 8054 | |
| 8055 | From F<vendorlib.U>: |
| 8056 | |
| 8057 | This variable is $vendorlibexp with any trailing version-specific component |
| 8058 | removed. The elements in inc_version_list (F<inc_version_list.U>) can |
| 8059 | be tacked onto this variable to generate a list of directories to search. |
| 8060 | |
| 8061 | =item C<vendorlibexp> |
| 8062 | |
| 8063 | From F<vendorlib.U>: |
| 8064 | |
| 8065 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorlib, so that you |
| 8066 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. |
| 8067 | |
| 8068 | =item C<vendorman1dir> |
| 8069 | |
| 8070 | From F<vendorman1dir.U>: |
| 8071 | |
| 8072 | This variable contains the name of the directory for man1 |
| 8073 | pages. It may have a F<~> on the front. |
| 8074 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 8075 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own |
| 8076 | man1 pages in this directory with |
| 8077 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor |
| 8078 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 8079 | |
| 8080 | =item C<vendorman1direxp> |
| 8081 | |
| 8082 | From F<vendorman1dir.U>: |
| 8083 | |
| 8084 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorman1dir, so that you |
| 8085 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. |
| 8086 | |
| 8087 | =item C<vendorman3dir> |
| 8088 | |
| 8089 | From F<vendorman3dir.U>: |
| 8090 | |
| 8091 | This variable contains the name of the directory for man3 |
| 8092 | pages. It may have a F<~> on the front. |
| 8093 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 8094 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place their own |
| 8095 | man3 pages in this directory with |
| 8096 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor |
| 8097 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 8098 | |
| 8099 | =item C<vendorman3direxp> |
| 8100 | |
| 8101 | From F<vendorman3dir.U>: |
| 8102 | |
| 8103 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorman3dir, so that you |
| 8104 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. |
| 8105 | |
| 8106 | =item C<vendorprefix> |
| 8107 | |
| 8108 | From F<vendorprefix.U>: |
| 8109 | |
| 8110 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below |
| 8111 | which the vendor will install add-on packages. |
| 8112 | See C<INSTALL> for usage and examples. |
| 8113 | |
| 8114 | =item C<vendorprefixexp> |
| 8115 | |
| 8116 | From F<vendorprefix.U>: |
| 8117 | |
| 8118 | This variable holds the full absolute path of the directory below |
| 8119 | which the vendor will install add-on packages. Derived from vendorprefix. |
| 8120 | |
| 8121 | =item C<vendorscript> |
| 8122 | |
| 8123 | From F<vendorscript.U>: |
| 8124 | |
| 8125 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<VENDORSCRIPT> symbol. |
| 8126 | It may have a F<~> on the front. |
| 8127 | The standard distribution will put nothing in this directory. |
| 8128 | Vendors who distribute perl may wish to place additional |
| 8129 | executable scripts in this directory with |
| 8130 | MakeMaker F<Makefile.PL> C<INSTALLDIRS>=vendor |
| 8131 | or equivalent. See C<INSTALL> for details. |
| 8132 | |
| 8133 | =item C<vendorscriptexp> |
| 8134 | |
| 8135 | From F<vendorscript.U>: |
| 8136 | |
| 8137 | This variable is the F<~name> expanded version of vendorscript, so that you |
| 8138 | may use it directly in Makefiles or shell scripts. |
| 8139 | |
| 8140 | =item C<version> |
| 8141 | |
| 8142 | From F<patchlevel.U>: |
| 8143 | |
| 8144 | The full version number of this package, such as 5.6.1 (or 5_6_1). |
| 8145 | This combines revision, patchlevel, and subversion to get the |
| 8146 | full version number, including any possible subversions. |
| 8147 | This is suitable for use as a directory name, and hence is |
| 8148 | filesystem dependent. |
| 8149 | |
| 8150 | =item C<version_patchlevel_string> |
| 8151 | |
| 8152 | From F<patchlevel.U>: |
| 8153 | |
| 8154 | This is a string combining version, subversion and |
| 8155 | perl_patchlevel (if perl_patchlevel is non-zero). |
| 8156 | It is typically something like |
| 8157 | 'version 7 subversion 1' or |
| 8158 | 'version 7 subversion 1 patchlevel 11224' |
| 8159 | It is computed here to avoid duplication of code in F<myconfig.SH> |
| 8160 | and F<lib/Config.pm>. |
| 8161 | |
| 8162 | =item C<versiononly> |
| 8163 | |
| 8164 | From F<versiononly.U>: |
| 8165 | |
| 8166 | If set, this symbol indicates that only the version-specific |
| 8167 | components of a perl installation should be installed. |
| 8168 | This may be useful for making a test installation of a new |
| 8169 | version without disturbing the existing installation. |
| 8170 | Setting versiononly is equivalent to setting installperl's -v option. |
| 8171 | In particular, the non-versioned scripts and programs such as |
| 8172 | a2p, c2ph, h2xs, pod2*, and perldoc are not installed |
| 8173 | (see C<INSTALL> for a more complete list). Nor are the man |
| 8174 | pages installed. |
| 8175 | Usually, this is undef. |
| 8176 | |
| 8177 | =item C<vi> |
| 8178 | |
| 8179 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 8180 | |
| 8181 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 8182 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 8183 | |
| 8184 | =item C<voidflags> |
| 8185 | |
| 8186 | From F<voidflags.U>: |
| 8187 | |
| 8188 | This variable contains the eventual value of the C<VOIDFLAGS> symbol, |
| 8189 | which indicates how much support of the void type is given by this |
| 8190 | compiler. See C<VOIDFLAGS> for more info. |
| 8191 | |
| 8192 | =back |
| 8193 | |
| 8194 | =head2 x |
| 8195 | |
| 8196 | =over 4 |
| 8197 | |
| 8198 | =item C<xlibpth> |
| 8199 | |
| 8200 | From F<libpth.U>: |
| 8201 | |
| 8202 | This variable holds extra path (space-separated) used to find |
| 8203 | libraries on this platform, for example C<CPU>-specific libraries |
| 8204 | (on multi-C<CPU> platforms) may be listed here. |
| 8205 | |
| 8206 | =back |
| 8207 | |
| 8208 | =head2 y |
| 8209 | |
| 8210 | =over 4 |
| 8211 | |
| 8212 | =item C<yacc> |
| 8213 | |
| 8214 | From F<yacc.U>: |
| 8215 | |
| 8216 | This variable holds the name of the compiler compiler we |
| 8217 | want to use in the Makefile. It can be yacc, byacc, or bison -y. |
| 8218 | |
| 8219 | =item C<yaccflags> |
| 8220 | |
| 8221 | From F<yacc.U>: |
| 8222 | |
| 8223 | This variable contains any additional yacc flags desired by the |
| 8224 | user. It is up to the Makefile to use this. |
| 8225 | |
| 8226 | =back |
| 8227 | |
| 8228 | =head2 z |
| 8229 | |
| 8230 | =over 4 |
| 8231 | |
| 8232 | =item C<zcat> |
| 8233 | |
| 8234 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 8235 | |
| 8236 | This variable is defined but not used by Configure. |
| 8237 | The value is a plain '' and is not useful. |
| 8238 | |
| 8239 | =item C<zip> |
| 8240 | |
| 8241 | From F<Loc.U>: |
| 8242 | |
| 8243 | This variable is used internally by Configure to determine the |
| 8244 | full pathname (if any) of the zip program. After Configure runs, |
| 8245 | the value is reset to a plain C<zip> and is not useful. |
| 8246 | |
| 8247 | |
| 8248 | =back |
| 8249 | |
| 8250 | =head1 NOTE |
| 8251 | |
| 8252 | This module contains a good example of how to use tie to implement a |
| 8253 | cache and an example of how to make a tied variable readonly to those |
| 8254 | outside of it. |
| 8255 | |
| 8256 | =cut |
| 8257 | |